Home

Samsung CLX-6260ND multifunctional

image

Contents

1. 1 Dual Automatic Document 13 dumu Feeder DADF cover P y 2 ByarutomaneDacumeni le Document feeder output support Feeder DADF width guide P PP 3 Dual Automatic Document 15 Feeder DADF input tray Front cover handle 4 Dual Automatic Document 16 Scanner lid Feeder DADF output tray 5 Control panel 17 Scanner glass 6 18 Paper width guides on a multi Control board cover Panaad purpose tray 7 Front cover 19 Multi purpose support tray 8 Tray1 20 Toner cartridge 9 Optional tray 21 Toner cartridge handle 10 Push release of Multi purpose 22 pak Intermediate Transfer Belt ITB tray 11 Multi purpose tray 23 Duplex jam cover 12 USB memory port This is an optional feature CLX 626xND CLX 626xF D CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only 1 Introduction 22 Machine overview Rear view CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series 2 This illustration may differ from your machine depending on your model There are various types of machine e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 5 CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series 1 Waster toner container 4 Power receptacle USB port 10 Extension telephone socket EXT 2 Rear cover 5 Power switch Network port 3 Rear cover handle 6 5V output port for IEEE 1284B
2. e Some menus are grayed out depending on your options or models Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its Q He all KG options or the models Eng x Copy When you press Copy from the display screen the Copy screen appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options me Scan When you press Scan from the display screen the Scan screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Scanning options Fax When you press Fax from the display screen the Fax screen appears which has several tabs and lots of Faxing options setup You can browse current machine settings or change machine values EA Job Status Job status shows the jobs currently running completed job or in queue 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI Menu overview WY amp Eco You can view the eco settings co Direct USB Enters the USB menu when USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your machine 7 Document Box Youcan store the printing data print the secure page or shared folder i Nf Shows the toner status MEME Selects the LCD brightness and language lt AV gt Scroll through available options 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview Copy Fax Basic Copy Auto Border Erase Color Mode Memory Send Delayed Send Group Dial Send Darkness Tray1 Stamp Original Size Darkness Darkness Darkness Original Type Tray2 Item Original Type Resolution Resolution Resolution Tex
3. Otherwise you could damage the machine 1 Introduction 18 Safety information Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire O al When storing supplies such as toner cartridges keep them away from children Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested e Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws e Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician Repair by non certified technicians could result in fire or electric shock e The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician Supply usage A Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested Using recycled supplies such as toner can cause damage to the machine In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies a service fee will be charged When toner gets on your clothing do not use hot water to wash it Hot water sets toner into fabric Use cold water Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire O When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested 1 Introduction 19
4. 4 Special Features 281 Scan features You can scan the originals with your machine via an USB cable or the network 2 e For basic scanning features refer to the Basic Guide see Basic scanning The following methodoloqies can be used for scanning your documents on page 76 Scan to PC Scan the originals from the control panel Then the scanned data will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder see Basic Scanning on page 76 e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 e The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various factors including computer speed available disk space memory the e TWAIN TWAIN is the one of a preset imaging applications Scanning an size of the image being scanned and bit depth settings Thus depending image launches the selected application enabling you to control the on your system and what you are scanning you may not be able to scan scanning process This feature can be used via the local connection or the at certain resolutions especially using enhanced dpi network connection see Scanning from image editing program on page 286 Samsung Scan Assistant Samsung Easy Document Creator You can use this program to scan images or documents Basic scanning method See Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant on page 287 See Using Samsung Easy Document Creator on page 314 Thi
5. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth Dampen the cloth slightly with water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine 3 Maintenance 108 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine This buildup can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems A To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area Use a dry lint free cloth when cleaning the inside of the machine be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine Use a dry lint free cloth to clean the machine Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 3 Maintenance 109 Cleaning the machine 3
6. You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black 5 Appendix 164 Regulatory information You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of conformity European countries Approvals and Certifications Hereby Samsung Electronics declares that this CLX 419xN Series CLX 626xND Series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC EMC Directive 2004 108 EC Hereby Samsung Electronics declares that this CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R amp TTE Directive 1999 5 EC Cf The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com go to Support 5 Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electrom
7. see Features by models on page 5 Setting up an FTP SMB server Aa uu fb W N co N Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 Select Address Book gt Individual gt Add Check the box next to Add FTP or Add SMB Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 Check the box next to Anonymous then the server permits the access of unauthorized people Enter the login name and password Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain otherwise just enter your computer name which is registered to the SMB server 4 Special Features 285 Scan features 9 Enter the path for saving the scanned image Scanning from image editing program You can scan and import documents at the image editing software such as Adobe Photoshop if the software is TWAIN compliant Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root The folder properties need to be setup as a share e Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder 1 0 Press Apply 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Scanning and sending to FTP SMB server 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals o
8. KU Some tabs may not appear depending on your model 2 Your machine s embedded website opens Logging into SyncThru Web Service Information tab Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service you need to log inasan This tab gives you general information about your machine You can check administrator You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but things such as remaining amount of toner You can also print reports such as an you won t have access to Settings tab and Security tab error report Active Alerts Shows the alerts that have occurred in the machine and their severity Supplies Shows how many pages are printed and amount of toner left in the cartridge 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using SyncThru Web Service Usage Counters Shows the usage count by print types simplex and duplex e Current Settings Shows the machine s and network s information Security Information Shows the machine s security information e Print information Prints reports such as system related reports e mail address and font reports Settings tab This tab allows you to set configurations provided by your machine and network You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab e Machine Settings tab Sets options provided by your machine Network Settings tab Shows options for the network environment Sets options such as TCP IP and network protocols Security tab T
9. Menu overview Fax Feature Fax Setup Darkness Multi Send Sending DRPD Mode Light 5 Light 1 Delay Send Redial Times Ring to Answer Normal Send Forward Redial Term Stamp RCV Dark 1 Dark 5 Forward to Fax Prefix Dial Name Original Type Forward to Email ECM Mode Rey StarEGeee Text Pormatdite Fax Auto Reduction Text Photo Server Confirmation Discard Size Photo Receive Forward image TER DRPD Mode Resolution Forward to Fax Dial Mode Duplex Print Standard Forward to PC Toll Save Change Default Fine Forward to Email Receiving Resolution Super Fine AHA PA Receive Mode Darkness Original Size Server kax Original Type Duplex Forward amp Print Tel Original Size 1 Sided Secure Receive Ans Fax Duplex 2 Sided Off 2 Sided Rotated On Print Cancel Job a CLX 419xFN CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only b CLX 626xFR Series only c CLX 626xFD CLX 626XFR Series only d This option may not be available depending on your country Original Size Reduce Enlarge Duplex 1 Sided 1 gt 2Sided 1 gt 2Sided Rotated 2 gt 1Sided 2 gt 2Sided 2 gt 1Sided Rotated Auto Color Darkness Light 5 Light 1 Normal Dark 1 Dark 5 Original Type Text Text Photo Copy Feature Photo Magazine Layout Normal 2 Up 4 Up ID Copy BookCopy Adjust Bkgd Off Auto Enhance Lev 1 Enhance Lev 2 Erase Lev 1 Erase Lev 4 Edge Erase Off Small Original Hole Punch Book Center
10. 4 Troubleshooting 134 Understanding the status LED LED Status Description Blinking The machine is connecting to a wireless network Wireless Blue On The machine is connected to a wireless network see Wireless network setup on page 192 Off The machine is disconnected from a wireless network On The machine is in power save mode Power Blue oft The machine is in ready mode or machine s power is off Wakeup On Eco mode is on see Eco printing on page 68 Eco Green Off Eco mode is off a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment percentage of image area printing interval graphics media and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing b Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country see Control panel overview on page 24 4 Troubleshooting 135 Understanding display messages Messages appear on the control panel display to indicate the machine s status or errors Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and correct the problem if necessary 2 You can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers s Printing Status program window see Using
11. Clone Auto Fit Book 2 up 4 up Adjust background Margin shift Edge erase Gray enhance Duplex copy a If you use the parallel port you cannot use the USB cable b Depending on your country wireless LAN card may not be available For some counties only 802 11 b g can be applied Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine c Available for Windows OS only d Only tray1 is supported e The machine is equipped with 4GB of SD secure digital card e Included o Optional Blank Not available Useful to know WE The machine does not print Open the print queue list and remove the document from the list ee Canceling a print job on page 65 Remove the driver and install it again see Installing the driver locally on page 30 Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows see Setting your machine as a default machine on page 266 tay Where can purchase accessories or supplies Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer Visit www samsung com supplies Select your country region to view product service information balag The status LED flashes or remains constantly on Turn the product off and on again Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly see Understanding the status LED on page 134 A paper jam has occurred Open and close
12. Connecting Failure General Connection Error Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine Check the USB cable and your machine s power Connecting Failure Connected Wired Network Your machine is connected with a wired network cable Remove the wired network cable from your machine Connecting Failure Assigning the IP address Cycle the power for the access point or wireless router and machine PC Connection Error The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and machine 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 212 Wireless network setup Fora DHCP network environment 3 Change the printer port s IP address if it is different from the network The machine receives the IP address automatically DHCP when In OMIA ORSEE ODES computer is configured to DHCP If you want to use the software installation CD to change the port IP Connect to a network printer Then reconnect the IP address 2 If the printing job is not working in DHCP mode the problem may be caused Fora Static network environment by the automatically changed IP address Compare the IP address between the product s IP address and the printer port s IP address The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static address How to compare For example 1 Print the network information report of your printer and then check the O IP address see Printing a network configuration repor
13. Definition Uses existing machine driver files to create printer instance if it is already installed Description This command provides a way to install a printer instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver n lt Printer name gt Specifies printer name With this parameter you can up lt printer name gt or UP lt printer Removes only specified printer instance and not the driver files This command provides a way to remove only specified printer instance from your system without effecting name gt or Printer instance shall be add printer instances as your other printer drivers It will N lt Printer name gt created as specified printer wishes not remove printer driver files name from your system nd or Commands not to set the It indicates installed machine dor Uninstalls all device drivers This command will remove all ND installed driver as a default driver will not be the default D and applications from your installed device drivers and machine driver machine driver on your system if there are one or more printer drivers installed If there is no installed machine driver on your system then this option won t be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver system application software from your system v lt share name gt or V lt share name
14. No 9 tray Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches EnvelopeC5 162 x 229 mm 6 38 x 9 02 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 49 x 6 38 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 104g m2 24to 90t0104g m 24 91 to 105 g m 24t028 91 to 105 g m 24 to 28 peter to thig 28 Ibs bond to 28 Ibs bond Ibs bond Ibs bond Plain paper section e 50 sheets of 105 g 1 sheet 50 sheets of 105 g m 10 sheets m 28 Ibs bond 28 Ibs bond Thicker Refertothe Refer to the Plain paper section 164 to 220 g m 43to 164to 220g m 43 164to 220 g m 43to59 164 to 220 g m 43 to paper Plain paper 59 Ibs bond to 59 Ibs bond Ibs bond 59 Ibs bond ti paaa 50 sheets of 220 g 1 sheet 50 sheets of 220 g m 10 sheets m 59 Ibs bond 59 Ibs bond Not available in optional tray Thin paper Refertothe Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to69g m 16to 19 60t0699 M 16to 60to70g m7 16to19 60 to 70 g m 16 to 19 Plain paper Ibs bond 19 Ibs bond Ibs bond Ibs bond ae e 250 sheets of 70 g 1 sheet 50 sheets m 19 Ibs bond 250 sheets of 70 g m 19 Ibs bond 5 Appendix i Specifications Weight Capacity CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series Type Size Dimensions i j CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Cotton Color Refertothe Refer to the Plain paper section 75t090g m 20t024
15. Operating System CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series Windows Mac Linux Unix e Included Blank Not available Software You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive For windows select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window Software CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series SPL printer driver PCL printer driver Features by models Software CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series PS printer driver XPS printer driver Direct Printing Utility Samsung Easy Printer Scan to PC settings Manager Fax to PC settings CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Device Settings Samsung Printer Status Samsung AnyWeb Print Samsung Easy Document Creator Easy Capture Manager Samgung Easy Color Manager SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Admin Web Service Easy Eco Driver Features by models Software CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series
16. TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline File Name Sets the file name JPEG JPEG Baseline File Policy Sets the policy to save files between overwirting or PDF PDF 1 7 or lower version renaming XPS PDF Encryption Sets the encrypts PDF files 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 83 Using USB memory device To print a document from a USB memory device Backing up data 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine and then press Direct USB Data in the machine s memory can be accidentally erased due to power failure or storage failure Backup helps you protect the system settings by storing them 2 Select USB Print as backup files on a USB memory device 3 Select the folder or file you want and press OK If you see or D in the front of a folder name there are one or more Backing up data files or folders in the selected folder 1 Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your 4 Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number machine 5 Press OK Start or Print to start printing the selected file 2 Select Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Export Setting After printing the file the display asks if you want to print another job on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup gt Export 6 Press OK when Yes appears to print another job and repeat from step 2 Setting on the touch screen Otherwise press the left righ
17. This setting is necessary for using the e mail notification option 2 Your machine s embedded website opens 3 From the Settings tab select Machine Settings gt E mail Notification Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine 5 Useful Management Tools ga Using SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 2 Your machine s embedded website opens 3 From the Security tab select System Security 5 System Administrator 4 Enter the name of the administrator phone number location and email address 5 Click Apply 5 Useful Management Tools 313 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These 9 The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools Easy Document Creator sansung Easy Document Creator 2 KA Availabe for Windows OS users only e Windows XP or
18. A single sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting the job A A 3 S The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of paper AaBbG e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper AaBbO Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set type to Thick see Opening AaBbo printing preferences on page 66 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative White Spots If white spots appear on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from paper falls to the inner components within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 The paper path may need cleaning Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative 6 Troubleshooting 336 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface drum part of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 If white vertical streaks appear on the page The surface of the LSU pa
19. BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Defa
20. Border Erase Stamp Item Opacity Position WaterMark Message Pages 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 34 Menu overview CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only This option does not appear when the 2 Up 4 Up Book copy Duplex Auto Fit option is on or the original document is loaded in ADF DADF This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy This option appears only when the Item option is On This option does not appear when the Message option is Off ee ie STO FAM 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview Copy Setup Change Default Original Size Copies Copy Collation Reduce Enlarge Duplex 1 Sided 1 gt 2Sided 1 gt 2Sided Rotated 2 gt 1Sided 2 gt 2Sided 2 gt 1Sided Rotated Auto Color Darkness Light 5 Light 1 Normal Dark 1 Dark 5 a CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models b CLX 626xFR Series only Original Type Text Text Photo Photo Magazine c CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Scan Feature USB Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode Color Gray Mono File Format Duplex Darkness Email Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution
21. ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov For ENERGY STAR certified models the ENRGY STAR label will be on your machine Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an as environmentally responsible manner China only DE UAC AN FS 1 AR TS RD ABE BES LA BIO ih ENT TRU FE IA FR BE o RTS A ETC GEE EC SS BEA hh A IRS o NG RED AB TELE TE ID WSS AG ER gy BA EAT E Fe RAR PENIS IY N EER SS o E FR Ae 8c R mg TEN BLY AE RE CKW h COXCHTOSFWI CLX4195FN CLXATOSN GLX 6260ND ita CLX 6260FW CLX 6260FD CLX 6260FR AKG FE Ax PRE GB 25956 2010 5 Appendix 158 Regulatory information Correct disposal of this product Waste electrical amp electronic equipment Applicable in the european union and other european countries with separate collection systems K This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources H
22. K To use a saved setting select it in the Favorites tab The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected The Favorites option which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences for future use To delete saved settings select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete To save a Favorites item follow these steps 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and Favorites press F1 on your keyboard Orientation x Landscape Layout Options x Layout Poster Printing Post 3 Click Save 4 Enter name and description and then select the desired icon 5 Click OK When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic printing 1 Select B Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Eco Settings on Eco printing the control panel Or press Eco on the control panel The Eco function cuts toner consumption and paper usage The Eco function Or select Eco gt Settings gt Next on the touch screen allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco friendly printing If you press the Eco button from the control panel eco mode is enabled The 2 Select the option you want and press OK default setting of Eco mode is duplex CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Default Mode
23. Machine Setup gt Next gt Reports gt Address Book on the touch screen 4 Special Features 261 Setting up the fax address book Editing speed dial numbers uu Bb W N Select 4S fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Speed Dial on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View List gt Individual on the touch screen Enter the speed dial number you want to edit and press OK Change the name and press OK Change the fax number and press OK Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode Registering a group dial number Select pis fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Group Dial on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View List gt Group gt BEE options gt Add on the touch screen Enter a group dial number and press OK 2 If an entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the N OO UW A 00 message to allow you to change it To start over with another speed dial number press Back Search by entering the first few letters of the speed dial s name to put in the group Select the name and number you want and press OK Select Yes when Add appears Repeat step 3 to include other speed dial numbers into the group When you have finished select No when Another No appears and press OK Press Stop C
24. Machine overview Accessories Power cord Quick installation guide Software CD Misc accessories a The software CD contains the print drivers user s guide and software applications b Miscellaneous accessories included with your machine may vary by country of purchase and specific model 1 Introduction EJ Machine overview 1 Automatic Document Feeder 12 Front cover handle ADF cover 2 Automatic Document 13 Srshneriid i Thisillustration may differ from your machine depending on your model Feeder ADF width guide y There are various types of machine 3 Automatic Document 14 e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on Scanner glass Feeder ADF input tray model or country see Features by models on page 5 4 Automatic Document 15 Paper width guides on a manual Feeder ADF output tray feeder CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series 5 Control panel te Manual feeder 6 17 Paper width guides on a multi Control board cover gt purpose tray 7 Front cover 18 Multi purpose support tray 8 Tray 1 19 Toner cartridge 9 USB memory port 20 Toner cartridge handle 10 Output tray 21 Intermediate Transfer Belt ITB 11 Document feeder output support a CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series only 1 Introduction exe Machine overview CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series
25. Select this to turn on or off the eco mode CLX 626xFW Series only Multiple Pages per Side 2 up Skip Blank Pages Off Settheeco mode off On Set the eco mode on You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program Ja WU If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager 5 s4Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco the On force Device Settings on page 321 message appears You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status late Foll h ingsf hru W i Setting Eco mode on the control panel Change Template Follow the settings from Syncthru Web Service or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Before you select this item you must set the eco function in SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt 2 The settings set from the machine s driver override the settings on the Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy control panel Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the Select Template menu on page 33 or Control panel overview on page 24 oo pag P pag Default Eco The machine is set to Default Eco mode e It may be necessary to pre
26. The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat pressure from the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper Glossary 366 Glossary TWAIN Watermark An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scan
27. Windows on page 178 See IPv4 configuration using SetIP Mac on page 179 See IPv4 configuration using SetIP Linux on page 180 The machine that does not support the network port it will not be able 4 to use this feature see Rear view on page 23 e TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wired network setup Printing a network configuration report Setting IP address You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine s control panel that will show the current machine s network settings This will help you to set The machine that does not support the network interface it will not be up a network able to use this feature see Rear view on page 23 e TCP IPv6 is not supported by this program 2 e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 First you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP some models Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol server located on the network The machine has the display screen Press the Menu button on the IPv4 configuration using SetIP Windows control panel and select Network gt Network Configuration The machine has the touch screen Press Setup from the Main screen 5 Before using the SetIP p
28. in the inside duplex Clear the jam see In the duplex unit area on page 133 Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in the paper exit area Clear the jam see In the exit area on page 129 4 Troubleshooting 136 J Understanding display messages Toner related messages Message Error error number Toner Failure error number color Install color toner again color toner not installed Install color toner cartridge Meaning A toner cartridge is not installed Suggested solutions Reinstall the toner cartridge Message Prepare new color toner Prepare new color toner cartridge Meaning Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Suggested solutions Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 95 A toner cartridge is not being detected Reinstall the toner cartridge two or three times to confirm it is seated properly If the problem persists contact the service representatives Not remove protective film from toner Remove the protective film from the toner cartridge Refer to Quick Installation Guide provided with your machine color toner Not compatible color toner cartridge is not compatible Check guide Theindicated toner cartridge is not s
29. removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk around before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt electricity again Devices and Printers e For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt When installing accessories the battery inside the machine is a service Devices and Printers component Do not change it by yourself There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used batteries according to 3 Right click your machine the instructions 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties 3 Maintenance 102 Installing accessories LS ig U an LS If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer Select Device Options The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using Select the appropriate option Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models if so it is not applicable to your machine
30. 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 1 0 The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears Click Next 11 When the wireless network settings are completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Click Next 12 Click Next when the Printers Found window appears 1 3 Select the components to be installed Click Next 14 After selecting the components you can also change the machine name set the machine to be shared on the network set the machine as the default machine and change the port name of each machine Click Next 15 If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and receive useful information click On line Registration If not click Finish Setup using Mac Items to prepare e Access point e Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 202 Wireless network setup e USBcable 11 After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of the access point you want to use and click Next If the wireless network is already set up the Wireless Network Information window appears Select I want to install software with the current settings Recommended Then click Next Access point via USB cable recommended Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine Turn on your compute
31. 1 7 and below For higher versions you must open the file to print it Printing There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Direct Printing Utility gt Direct Printing Utility The Direct Printing Utility window appears Select your machine from the Select Printer drop down list and click Browse Select the file you wish to print and click Open The file is added in the Select Files section Customize the machine settings for your needs Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine 4 Special Features Printing features Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file to print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added 2 Select the machine to use 3 Customize the machine settings 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine KU Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported Printing a document When you print with a Mac you need to check the printer driver settings in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Mac 1 Open the document to print 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling other options and make s
32. 23 Refer to the Quick Installation Guide how to make a connection The method of making a telephone connection is different from one country to another You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone For more di information ask your internet service provider Sending a fax e We recommend using traditional analog phone services PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network when connecting telephone lines to use a fax machine If you use other Internet services DSL ISDN VoIP you can improve the connection quality by using the Micro filter The Micro filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet quality Since the DSL Micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your Internet service provider for use on DSL Micro filter e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 or Control panel overview on page 24 When you place the originals you can use either the document feeder or the scanner glass If the originals are placed on both the document feeder and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the document feeder first which has higher priority in scanning 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Select le fax on the control panel 2 S 1 Line port 2 Micro filter Or select Fax
33. 5 Switches to Fax mode Fax amp 6 Arrows Scroll through the options available in the selected menu and increase or decrease values 7 OK Confirms the selection on the screen 8 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters see Keypad letters and numbers on page 260 9 Address Book Allows you to store frequently used fax numbers or search for stored fax numbers see Storing email address on page 258 or Setting up the fax address book on page 261 10 ii a 9 Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode or inserts a pause into a fax number in edit Realiai Pause mode see Redialing the fax number on page 292 11 Stops current operation Stop Clear 12 p Wak Turns the power on or off or wakes up the machine from the power save mode If you need to turn the machine off press aaa this button for more than three seconds 13 Begins a printing job in color mode Color J P IJ Start Black Begins a printing job in black and white mode 14 iDa When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker Oog Dla phone see Receiving manually in Tel mode on page 298 1 Introduction ka Control panel overview 15 Back Sends you back to the upper menu level 16 Menu gt Enters Menu mode and scrolls through the available menus see Menu overview on page 33 17 Switches to Scan mode Scan
34. CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series ML PAR100 b The optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port 3 Maintenance EI Available maintenance parts To purchase maintenance parts contact the source where you bought the machine Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine The warranty does not cover the replacement of any maintenance parts once it has reached its Average yield Maintenance parts are replaced at specific intervals to avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts see table below The purpose of which is to maintain your machine in top working condition The maintenance parts below should be replaced when the life span of each item has been met Average yield Parts CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Transfer Roller Approx 100 000 pages Approx 100 000 pages Fuser Unit Approx 50 000 pages Approx 100 000 pages Pick Up Roller Approx 200 000 pages Approx 300 000 pages Retard Roller Approx 100 000 pages Approx 100 000 pages Intermediate Transfer unit ITB Approx 100 000 pages Approx 100 000 pages a It will be affected by the operating system used computing performance application software connecting method media media size and job complexity 3 Maintenance 9
35. CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series Samsung Network PC Fax CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Twain scan driver WIA scan driver Samsung Scan Assistant a Download the software from the Samsung website and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Before installing check whether your computer s OS support the software e Included Blank Not available Features by models Variety feature Features CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series Hi Speed USB 2 0 Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX wired LAN IEEE 1284B parallel connector Network Interface 802 1 1b g n wireless LAN Google Cloud Print AirPrint Eco printing Duplex 2 sided printing Duplex 2 sided printing manual USB memory interface Memory module Optional tray Tray2 Mass Storage Device Features by models Features CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series Document Feeder Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF CLX 626xFR Series only Automatic Document Feeder ADF CLX 626xND C
36. Email To Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption gt Duplex Darkness File Name SMB Destination Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Scan Duplex Darkness File Name FTP Destination Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness File Name Custom Email To Subject From CC BCC Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness File Name USB Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness File Policy Shared Folder Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness File Policy WSD Eco Eco On On Off Settings Default Mode On Off On Forced Feature Configuration Default Custom 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview a CLX 626xFW Series only b This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type c If you set the eco mode on with a password from the SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco the On force message appears You have to enter the password to change the eco mode status 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup las Menu ov
37. FTP SMB server on page 285 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or e FTP models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on age 33 PE y e SMB Feature Sets scan destination to an SMB server You scan the oa SMB Default originals and send the scanned image to an SMB server SMB see Scanning to FTP SMB server on page 285 To change the menu options Sets scan destination to a usb connected computer You scan the originals and save the scanned image to a Local PC e Press D scan gt 8 Menu gt Scan Feature on the control panel directory such as My Documents see Basic Scanning on page 76 Or Scan to gt 3 Menu gt Scan Feature on the control panel Sets scan destination to a network connected e Orpress Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Scan Default computer You scan the originals and save the scanned on the touch screen Network PC image to a directory such as My Documents see u i f k hi e Or press Scan gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen a KOBE RE on connotea ieee nae Item Description USB Default Sets scan destination to a USB You scan the originals USB Feature and save the scanned image to a USB device USB e Email Default Sets scan destination to an email You scan the originals Custom Email and email the scanned image to destinations see Scanning to email on page 284 Scan t
38. Forward to PC gt Forward on the touch screen Open the Samsung Easy Printer Manager Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List Select Fax to PC Settings menu Use Enable Fax Receiving from Device to change the fax settings Image Type Convert the received faxes to PDF or TIFF Save Location Select location to save the converted faxes Prefix Select prefix Print received fax After receiving the fax set prints information for the received fax Notify me when complete Set to show the popup window to notify receiving a fax Open with default application After receiving the fax open it with default application None After receiving a fax the machine does not notify the user or opens the application 5 Press Save gt OK Changing the receive modes 1 Press amp fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving gt Receive Mode on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax Default gt Common gt Receive Mode on the touch screen 2 Select the option you want Fax Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax reception mode Tel Receives a fax by pressing Con Hook Dial and then Start button 4 Special Features i Fax features Ans Fax Is for when an answering machine attached to your machine Your machine answers an incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine sen
39. Maintenance Cleaning the machine Cleaning the pickup roller Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 3 Maintenance aa J Cleaning the machine Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the day as needed 2 e Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down If your machine has a power switch turn the power switch off before cleaning the machine e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Lift and open the scanner lid 3 Maintenance 112 J Cleaning the machine 3 Wipe the surface of the scanner until it is clean and dry Scanner lid Scanner glass Document feeder glass White bar hWN 4 Close the scanner lid 3 Maintenance 113 I Tips for moving amp storing your machine When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwis
40. Select a printer that has been already added Paper Source Select from which tray the paper is used By default it is Auto 3 Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection Selection 4 Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies Orientation Select the direction in which information is printed on a page Duplex Print on both sides of paper to save paper 4 Special Features 280 Printing features Printer Specific Settings tab Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the Ipr printing system or other applications for odd even printing Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various settings These options are specific to the printer and depend on the PPD file Multiple pages Print several pages on one side of the paper Page Border Choose any of the border styles e g Single line hairline Double line hairline Image tab In this tab you can change the brightness resolution or image position of your document Text tab Set the character margin line space or the columns of the actual print output Margins tab Use Margins Set the margins for the document By default margins are not enabled The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields Set by default these values depend on the page size selected Unit Change the units to points inches or centimeters
41. Special Features 263 Setting up the fax address book 1 Select ct A5 fax gt Address Book gt Print on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Reports gt Address Book on the touch screen 2 Press OK The machine begins printing 4 Special Features 264 Registering authorized users 9 Enter User Name Login ID Password Confirm Password E mail This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods Address and Fax Number see Features by models on page 5 K You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual s To send a scanned image copy image or fax data through email or via network after this group is created server safely you must register account information of authorized users to your local machine using SyncThru Web Service 1 0 Click Apply 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 4 Click Security 5 User Access Control 5 Authentication 5 Select Basic Authentication in the Authentication Mode and select Local Authentication in the AA Method and click 6 Click Apply 7 Click OK in the confirmation pop up window 8 Click User Profile 5 A
42. Stop Clear button twice while setting the Or select Copy gt Basic Copy gt Fe settings on the touch screen copy options all of the options you have set for the current copy job will be canceled and returned to their default status Or they will 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the automatically return to their default status after the machine completes documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on the copy in progress page 60 e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 3 If you want to customize the copy settings including Reduce Enlarge Darkness Original Type and more by using the control panel buttons see Changing the settings for each copy on page 71 e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models 4 Enter the number of copies using the arrow or number keypad if necessary Darkness 5 Press Q Start If you have an original containing faint marking and dark images you can adjust the brightness to make a copy that is easier to read 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying 1 Select SS copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature gt Darkness on the 1 Select copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature gt Original Type on the control panel control panel Or press Darkness on the control panel Or select B Menu gt Copy Feature gt Original Type on the control Or sel
43. To cancel the wireless network connection when the machine is connecting to the wireless network press and release the x Stop or Stop Clear on the control panel You need to wait 2 minutes to re connect to the wireless network To disconnect the wireless network connection press the 9 WPS button on the control panel for more than two seconds When the Wi Fi network is in idle mode The machine is immediately disconnected from the wireless network and the WPS LED turns off When the Wi Fi network is being used While the machine waits until the current job is finished the light blinks fast on the WPS LED Then the wireless network connection is automatically disconnected and the WPS LED turns off Using the menu button or touch screen LA Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see CLX 419xFW CLX 626xFW Series on page 39 Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point or wireless router was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who set up your network 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wireless network setup KA After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a machine driver to print from an application see Installing driver over
44. Toner Status Alert the user to change the toner cartridge appears You can touch screen set the option for this message to appear or not Item Description Machine ID Sets the machine ID which will be printed at the top of each fax page that you send Sets the fax number which will be printed at the top of Fax Number each fax page that you send Date amp Time Sets the date and time Clock Mode aaa the format for displaying time between 12 hr and 3 Useful Setting Menus 240 System setup Item ImageOverwrite Description You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the memory The machine overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery Manual When printing copying scanning and faxing the machine temporarily uses memory space For security reasons you can set the machine to manually overwrite secure non volatile memory If you want to secure memory space you can manually overwrite secure non volatile memory Automatic When a job is completed there are temporal images left in the memory For security reasons you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non volatile memory If you want to secure memory space you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non volatile memory Item System Timeout Description Sets the time that the machine remembers previously used copy settings After the timeout the machine restores the default cop
45. XPS job does not print because the m Page Rai printer is out of memory e e You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the ati KN software CD into your CD ROM drive ai Wal For windows select the printer XPS driver in the Select Software to Install window man Ga 2 Click Print Printing to a file PRN 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file For example c Temp file name WU If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents Documents and Settings or Users The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 4 Special Features Printing features Understanding special printer features You can use advanced printing features when using your machine To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print settings The machine name that appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use on page 67 Item Multiple Pages per Side _ rr KA e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Select the Help menu or click the 7 button from the window or press F1 on your keyboard and click
46. a fire Tray extend lever 1 2 Paper length guide 3 Paper width guide 4 Paper width guides on a manual feeder 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray For Legal sized paper Loading paper in the tray Push button as shown and pull out the tray KA Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 Tray 1 optional tray 1 Pull out the paper tray Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Tray overview on page 48 If you do not adjust the guide it may cause paper registration image skew or jamming of the paper 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray 2 Squeeze and the paper width guide and paper length lever to locate them in the correct paper size slot marked at the bottom of the tray to adjust to the size see Tray overview on page 48 CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers After inserting paper into the tray squeeze the paper width guides and paper length guide CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series 1 Paper length guide 2 Pape
47. again 4 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the multi purpose or manual feeder tray For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel see Setting the paper size and type on page 58 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup B Media and tray 2 The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the KA e When using special media we recommend you feed one sheet at a time control panel see Print media specifications on page 146 a To print in application open an application and start the print menu e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine b Open Printing Preferences See Opening printing preferences on depending on its options or models Check your machine type see page 66 Front view on page 21 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type For example if you want to use a label set the paper type to Label To see for paper weights for each sheet refer to Print media specifications on d Select Manual Feeder or MP Tray in paper source then press OK page 146 e Start printing in application If your machine has multi purpose tray press OK on the control panel a Manual feeder Multi each time you load a sheet of paper types iray i Optional tray purpose tray Plain Thick e Printing on special media Thicker e Thin The table bel
48. and Outgoing Mail Server SMTP Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535 Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication Enter the SMTP server login name and password Press Apply If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP put a check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication Enter the IP address and port number 4 Special Features 284 Scan features Scanning and sending an email 2 A CoO N OC UI Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Select scan gt Scan To Email on the control panel Or select Scan gt Send Email on the touch screen Enter the login name and password if you configured on SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 Enter the sender s and recipient s email address You can send an email to yourself by activating the Auto Send To Self option in the Settings gt Scan gt Scan To E mail on SyncThru Web Service Enter an email subject and press OK Select the file format to scan and press OK Enter the SMTP server login name and password The machine begins scanning and then sends the email Scanning to FTP SMB server K This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods
49. and turn it on again 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 190 IPv6 configuration 2 You can also set the DHCPv6 A Address must be enclosed in brackets To manually set the IPv6 address Check the Manual Address check box Then the Address Prefix text box is activated Enter the rest of the address e g 3FFE 10 88 194 AAAA A is the hexadecimal 0 through 9 A through F IPv6 address configuration 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL 2 Select one of the IPv6 addresses Link local Address Stateless Address Stateful Address Manual Address from Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 Link local Address Self configured local IPv6 address Address starts with FE80 Stateless Address Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router Stateful Address IPv6 address configured by a DHCPV6 server Manual Address Manually configured IPv6 address by a user 3 Enter the IPv6 addresses e g http FE80 215 99FF FE66 7701 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 191 Wireless network setup 2 e Make sure your machine supports wireless networking Wireless networking may not be available depending on the model see Features by models on page 5 If the IPv6 network seems to not be working set all the network settings to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting Unde
50. be available depending on your country Sends faxes at a preset toll saving time to save on call Toll Save costs This setting may not be available depending on your country Makes it easy to configure the necessary fax options such as machine ID fax number etc Receiving setup e Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 Setup Wizard 3 Useful Setting Menus 233 Fax To change the menu options Description Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers You can set the machine to recognize different ring patterns for each number This setting may not be available depending on your country see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 299 Item e Press pi fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving on the control panel e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax Default on the touch screen DRPD Mode e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen Item Description Selects the default fax receiving mode see Changing Receive Mode h des 567 the receive modes on page f Duplex Print Ring To Answer Specifies the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Automatically prints the page number and the date Stamp RCV Name and time of r
51. be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate e Check that the machine printer cable is connected properly e Make sure that the machine printer cable is not defective Switch the printer cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the printer cable e Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check scan setting in the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port for example USB001 The unit scans very slowly e Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed e Graphics are scanned more slowly than text e Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide 6 Troubleshooting 344 Scanning problems Condition Message appears on your computer screen e Device can t be set to the H W mode you want e Port is being used by another program e Portis disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again e Invalid handle e Scanning has failed Suggested solutions There may be a c
52. be saved in an editable text format e Book Scanning Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner Favorites User created favorites for frequently used scan settings SNS Upload Provides an easy and quick way to upload files to a variety of social networking sites SNS Scan an image directly or select an existing image to upload to Facebook Flickr Picasa Google Docs or Twitter see Scanning to a Social Networking Site on page 317 9 SNS Upload will only be available after Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 Service Pack 1 has been installed http www microsoft com download en details aspx id 22 and Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 7 0 or higher are required E Book Conversion Provides the ability to scan multiple documents in as one e book or convert existing files into an e book format epub file see Converting to an E Book on page 317 Send Fax Provides the ability to directly fax a document from Easy Document Creator if the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is installed see Sending a fax in the computer on page 293 If the Samsung Network PC Fax driver is not installed this will be grayed out Configuration Provides the options for a Common and Quick Scan Device Name Shows the scanning faxing device ready to use 5 Useful Management Tools BO Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Search If you cannot see any device ready to use click this button 5 Cl
53. e Tray Options Select the optional tray you installed You can select the tray Storage Options Select the optional memory you installed If this feature is checked you can select the Print Mode Printer Configuration Select the printer language for the print job e Administrator Settings You can select the Printer Status and EMF Spooling 7 Admin Job Accounting Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job If you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption e Custom Paper Size Settings You can specify custom paper size Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window 3 Maintenance 103 Installing accessories Upgrading a memory module Your machine has a dual in line memory module DIMM Use this memory module slot to install additional memory We recommend the use of only genuine Samsung DIMM s You may void your warranty if it is determined that your machine problem is being caused by third party DIMM s The order information is provided for optional accessories see Available accessories on page 91 After installing the optional memory you can use the advanced printing featu
54. gt Shares installed machine and add other available platform drivers for Point amp Print It will install all supported Windows OS platform s machine drivers to system and share it with specified lt share name gt for point and print o or O Opens Printers and Faxes folder after installation This command will open Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 183 Installing driver over the network 8 When the message which warns that all applications will close on your Command line Definition Description computer appears click Continue f lt log filename gt Specifies log filename It will create a log file to a or The default log file is specified folder 9 Click Continue on the User Options Pane F lt log filename gt created in the system temp folder if not specified A If you have not set the IP address yet click Set IP address and refer to IPv4 h H or Shows Command line Usage configuration using SetIP Mac on page 179 If you want to set the wireless setting refer to Setup using Mac on page 202 10 Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered GH 11 Enter the password and click OK 12 Installing software requir
55. gt 18 Show the status of each toner cartridge If the toner cartridge is low or needs to be replaced the Status LED turns red and Toner colors EAE EI the display shows the message However the arrow mark shows which color toner is of concern or may be installed with a new cartridge see Toner related messages on page 137 19 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine see Understanding the status LED on page 134 20 Eco Turn into eco mode to reduce toner consumption and paper usage when pc printing and copying only see Eco printing on page 68 21 Direct UeR Allows you to directly print files stored on a USB memory device when it is inserted into the USB port on the front of your machine a CLX 419xFN CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only b CLX 419xN CLX 626xND Series only 1 Introduction 26 Control panel overview Type B CLX 419xFW CLX 626xFW Series oo PP 11 10 9 8 7 6 1 Display screen Shows the current status and displays prompts during an operation 2 Numeric keypad Dials a number or enters alphanumeric characters see Keypad letters and numbers on page 260 3 Clear Deletes characters in the edit area 4 Stops an operations at any time Turns the power on or off or wakes up the machine from the power save mode If you need to turn the machine off press this button for more than three seconds 5 Power Wakeup 1 Introduction Control panel overview St
56. gt Report gt Fax Scheduled Jobs on the control panel Canceling a reserved fax job Press amp fax gt A Menu gt Fax Feature gt Cancel Job on the control panel Select the fax job you want and press OK Press OK when Yes highlights The selected fax is deleted from memory Press Stop Clear button to return to ready mode 4 Special Features 294 Fax features Forwarding a sent fax to another destination You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax an email or a server If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful K e When you forward a fax by an email you must first set the mail server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 e Though you sent or received a color fax the data is forwarded in grayscale 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Press amp fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Send Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Send Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 8 3 Enter the destinat
57. gt Start Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the epub file a file name and select a save location Click Save Convert Existing Files 1 2 3 4 5 Click E Book Conversion from the home screen Click Existing File to E Book gt Start Click Add Image to find the file to convert Enter a name and author to be used as metatag information for the epub file a file name and select a save location Click Save Sending a Fax Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Click Send Fax from the home screen Click add file and locate the file to fax 4 Click Send Fax Enter the fax information recipient s number cover page information etc 6 Click Send Easy Document Creator will also create new plug ins for Microsoft PowerPoint Word and Excel These new plug ins will be in a new Easy Document Creator menu on the applications menu bars Scan to Office Send Fax and E Book 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic 2 e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods sections as described in the table that follows see Software on page 5 e Available for Windows and Mac OS users only see Software on page 5 KU The screenshot may differ d
58. higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Document Creator e Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you install the machine software Understanding Samsung Easy Document Creator To open the program Select Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Document Creator gt Samsung Easy Document Creator 3 Click the information button to see the program s version N information The samsung Easy POGUMEN Creator interface is comprised of various basic Information a MAtIGHONG Help Click the help button to get the information of any option la you want to use 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Quick Scan Automatically scans with the settings provided in Configuration You can pre set the options such as image type document size resolution or file type see Quick Scanning on page 316 Scan Provides more in depth options for scanning documents ona one by one basis see Scanning on page 316 Text Converting will only be available after installing the optical character recognition OCR software proivided in a separate installation file Image Scanning Use for scanning single or mulitple pictures e Document Scanning Use for scanning documents with text or text and images e Text Converting Use for scanning documents that need to
59. is 8 64 characters When the wireless network set up is completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Click Next 12 Click Next when the Printers Found window appears 1 3 Select the components to be installed Click Next 14 After selecting the components you can also change the machine name set the machine to be shared on the network set the machine as the default machine and change the port name of each machine Click Next 15 If you want to register your machine with the Samusng web site and receive useful information click On line Registration If not click Finish Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point AP you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following the simple steps below Items to prepare Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface USB cable 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 200 Wireless network setup Creating the ad hoc network in Windows U Bb WN e2 Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Click Install Now Read the License Agreement and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next Choose the option in Using Enhanced Features and P
60. model name IP address or Port name and machine status KA You can view the online User s Guide Troubleshooting button This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the necessary section in the user s guide Application information Includes links for changing to the advanced settings switching Ul refresh preference setting summary help and about 2 The 77 button is used to change the user interface to the advanced settings user interface see Advanced settings user interface overview on page 320 Quick links Displays Quick links to machine specific functions This section also includes links to applications in the advanced settings If you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled Contents area Displays information about the selected machine remaining toner level and paper The information will vary based on the machine selected Some machines do not have this feature Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online K Select the Help menu or click the 7 button from the window and click on any option you want to know about Advanced settings user interface overview The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing the network and machine
61. necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models e You can set the machine s settings by using the Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Device Settings on page 321 1 Select Menu gt System Setup gt Maintenance gt TonerLow Alert on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup gt Toner Status Alert on the touch screen WA On the touch screen model you can set the toner s Warning Level for the toner low error in the Toner Status Alert option Warning Level means the remaining amount of toner 96 in the toner cartridge 2 Select the option you want 3 Press OK to save the selection 3 Maintenance Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment you need to clean your machine regularly to keep it in the best printing condition and use your machine longer A e Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvents or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet e Ifyour machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you
62. of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Image rubs off the copy easily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package e In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Frequent copy paper jams e Fan the paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the paper guides if occur necessary e Ensure that the paper is the proper type and weight see Print media specifications on page 146 e Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Toner cartridge produces fewer Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other copies than expected before documents that use more toner running out of toner The scanner lid may be left open while copies are being made e Turn the machine off and back on 6 Troubleshooting 343 Scanning problems Condition Suggested solutions The scanner does not work Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 There may not
63. or fonts that the machine does not support Unknown could be printed instead of the characters fonts in the report Encrypts the PDF files when you scan the originals in PDF format Select On to encrypt the PDF file and set PDF Encryption f YP up a password To open the file users need to enter the password Subject Sets an email s subject one From Sets a sender s email address one 3 Useful Setting Menus 239 acnine setup Receive Mode Selects the default fax receiving mode This feature works best when you are using an extension Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or telephone connected to the EXT socket on the back of models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on your machine You can receive a fax from someone you page 33 Receive code are talking to on the extension telephone without going to the fax machine 9 is the remote receive code preset at the factory see Receiving faxes with an extension To change the menu options telephone on page 299 Press 2 Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup on the control panel Select Country Sets the select country Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup on the touch Sound Volume Sets the sound volume option PCEN If toner in the cartridge has run out a message informing Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt select the menu item you want on the
64. over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description a To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences b Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Watermark Creating a c Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box Watermark You can enter up to 256 characters The message displays in the preview window a To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences Watermark b Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears c Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options Editing a watermark i d Click Update to save the changes e Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Watermark a To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences b Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list The Edit Watermarks window appears Deleting a c Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete Wafermand d Click OK or Print until
65. photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing 6 Troubleshooting 333 Printing problems Condition The machine does not print special sized paper such as billing paper Possible cause Paper size and paper size setting do not match Suggested solutions Set the correct paper size in the Custom in Paper tab in Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 The printed billing paper is curled The paper type setting does not match Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to Thin see Opening printing preferences on page 66 6 Troubleshooting 334 Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly there might be a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem Condition Light or faded print AabbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Suggested solutions If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page the toner supply is low Install a new toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 e The paper may not meet paper specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough If the entire page is light
66. print cycle Duty Cycle The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day Glossary 359 Glossary ECM EtherTalk Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Mac 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the seco
67. problems Condition Suggested solutions Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc CA BC An unknown image Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above repetitively appears on a few sheets e Change the printer s paper option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set type to Thin see Opening printing preferences on page 66 The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging Change the altitude setting for your machine see Altitude adjustment on page 257 Loose toner Light print or contamination occurs 6 Troubleshooting 342 Copying problems Condition Suggested solutions Copies are too light or too dark Adjust the darkness in copy feature to lighten or darken the backgrounds of copies see Changing the settings for each copy on page 71 Smears lines marks or spots Ifthe defects are on the original adjust darkness in copy feature to lighten the background of your copies appear on copies If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit see Cleaning the scan unit on page 112 Copy image is skewed e Ensure that the original is aligned with the registration guide e The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside
68. size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray 30Sec f a paper mismatch occurs an error message will display The machine waits for about 30 second then automatically clear the message and continue printing e Off If a paper mismatch occurs the machine waits until you insert the correct paper Item Auto Tray Switch Description Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match For example if both tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper the machine automatically prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper K This option does not appear if you selected Auto for Paper Source from printer driver Paper Substitution Automatically substitutes the printer driver s paper size to prevent the paper mismatch between Letter and A4 For example if you have A4 paper in the tray but you set the paper size to Letter in the printer driver the machine prints on A4 paper and vice versa Altitude Optimize print quality according to the machine s Adjustment altitude ae Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the Humidity R environment Allows you to append the required carriage return to Auto CR akda pp ba each line feed which is useful for Unix or DOS users Skip Blank Pages The printer detects the printing data from computer whether a page is empty or not You can set to print or skip the blank pag
69. software CD into your CD ROM drive and install the driver again see Installing the driver locally on page 30 1 Introduction ED 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup This chapter provides information about the overall menu structure and the basic setup options Menu overview 33 Machine s basic settings 46 Media and tray 48 Basic printing 64 Basic copying 71 Basic scanning 76 Basic faxing 77 Using USB memory device 81 Menu overview The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions 2 An checked V appears next to the currently selected menu Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models e The menus are described in the Advanced Guide see Useful Setting Menus on page 222 CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series Accessing the menu Select the Fax Copy or Scan button on the control panel depending on the feature to be used Select Menu until the menu you want appears on the bottom line of the display and press OK Press the arrows until the needed menu item appears and press OK 1 4 If the setting item has sub menus repeat step 3 5 Press OK to save the selection Press Stop Clear button to return to the ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Ei
70. the network on page 181 Select Setup Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt Wireless gt WLAN Settings on the touch screen Press the OK to select the setup method you want Ac cess point via USB cable recommended Items to prepare Access point Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface Search List recommended In this mode the setup is automatic USB cable The machine will display a list of available networks from which to choose After a network is chosen then printer will prompt for the Creating the infrastructure network corresponding security key Custom In this mode users can give or edit manually their own SSID Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine or choose the security option in detail Setup using Windows 9 Shortcut to the Wireless Setting program without the CD If you have installed the printer driver once you can access the Wireless Setting program without the CD From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Wireless Setting Program Turn on your computer access point and machine Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Click Install Now U Bb WN Read the License Agreement and select accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next Choose the option in Using Enhanced F
71. the Unified Driver Configurator Click Add Printer The Add printer wizard window opens Click Next Select Network printer and click the Search button The printer s IP address and model name appears on list field Select your machine and click Next Enter the printer description and click Next After the machine is added click Finish Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before installing the UNIX printer driver see Operating System on page 5 The commands are marked with when typing the commands do not type Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Operating System on page 5 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 186 Installing driver over the network To use the UNIX printer driver you have to install the UNIX printer driver 6 Run the install script package first then setup the printer You can download the UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads install i install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package Use chmod 755 install command to give the permission to the Installing the UNIX printer driver package installer script The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned 7 Execute the install c command to verify inst
72. the waste toner container needs to be replaced Check the waste toner container for your machine see Available consumables on page 89 3 e Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print quality problems occur e When you pull out the waste toner container out of the machine move the container carefully not to drop it from your hands e Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat surface so that the toner does not spill A Do not tilt or turn over the container 3 Maintenance 100 Replacing the waste toner container Installing accessories Disconnect the power cord When you install the optional devices such as optional tray memory etc this Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver you can set the optional devices To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power fi in Device Options cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Dish icel HG PENJE ANE PIRENEI 1 Click the Windows Start menu The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or 2 For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes
73. to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush cleaning mechanism and paper Originals The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer pr
74. unit cannot be controlled Reboot the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists please call for service 4 Troubleshooting 139 Understanding display messages Message Not Proper room temp Not Proper room Meaning The machine is in a room with improper room Suggested solutions Move the machine to a room with proper room temperature temperature temperature see Change room Specifications on temperature page 143 Prepare TR belt The life of the transfer Prepare the transfer Prepare new image transfer belt unit belt will expired soon belt with a new one Message Waste toner Full Waste toner container is almost full Replace with new one Meaning The life span of the waste toner container has expired and the printer will stop printing until a new waste toner container is placed into the printer Suggested solutions Replace a waste toner container with a Samsung genuine waste toner container Replace TR belt Replace with new image transfer belt uint The life of the transfer belt has expired Replace the transfer belt with a new one Contact the service representatives Replace Fuser uint Replace with new fuser uint The life of the fuser unit will be expired Replace the fuser unit Waste Not Installed Waste toner tank is not installed install it The waste toner container is not installed Install the waste
75. user wants to turn the Eco mode on off the user needs to enter the password Select Template Selects the eco template set from the SyncThru Web Service Address Book Views or prints the phone book or email address list Import Setting Imports data stored on a USB memory stick to the machine Export Setting Exports data stored on a USB memory stick to the machine Vapor Mode You can reduce the amount of water vapor produced during printing Off Disables vapor mode e On Enables vapor mode e Auto Automatically enters vapor mode according to time in high humidity environments 3 Useful Setting Menus 243 System setup Item Description Item Description Turns power off automatically when the machine has e Auto Color Reg The machine virtually prints certain patterned image to been in power save mode for the length of time set in Auto Color calibrate the color printing position This feature Auto Power Off gt On gt Timeout Registration enhances the colored image sharper and clearer which means the machine prints the colored image on the paper more like the one in the monitor K To turn the machine on again press the Auto Power Off Power Wakeup button on the control panel make su rethe mai power ouitchioon K If you have moved the machine it is strongly recommended to operate this menu manually e Ifyou run the printer driver or Samsung Eas
76. you are communicating with 1 Select 4F fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Resolution on the control supports color fax reception and you send the fax manually panel Or select Fax gt select a fax such as Memory Send On Hook Dial 3 Press X Stop Clear button or home fay icon to return to ready Delayed Send or etc gt Fe settings gt Resolution on the touch screen mode 2 Select the option you want and press OK Darkness Standard Originals with normal sized characters Fine Originals containing small characters or thin lines or originals You can select the degree of darkness of the original document printed using a dot matrix printer Super Fine Originals containing extremely fine detail Super Fine KI The darkness setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default mode is enabled only if the machine with which you are setting see Fax on page 231 communicating also supports the Super Fine resolution 1 Select eo fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Darkness on the control 2 e For memory transmission Super Fine mode is not available The panel resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine e When your machine is set to Super Fine resolution and the fax machine Or select Fax gt select a fax such as Memory Send On Hook Dial with which you are communicating does not support Super Fine Delayed Send or etc gt Fe settings gt Darkness on the touch screen resolu
77. you exit the Print window This option is available only when you use the PCL SPL printer driver see Software on page 5 An overlay is text and or images stored in the computer hard disk drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document aces Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing veray exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document A A To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image Q e The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark e The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description a To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences b Click the Advanced tab and select Edit from the Text drop down list Edit Overlay window appears Overlay c In the Edit Overlay window click Create d In the Save As window type a name up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is Creating a new page C For
78. your CD ROM drive and click OK WU e If you are a Mac Linux or UNIX operating systems user refer to the Installation for Mac on page 172 or Installation for Linux on page 174 3 Select Install Now or Installing the UNIX printer driver package on page 187 e Theinstallation window in this User s Guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use e Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters 118 inches Q Install Now Windows 1 mana Sade Select User s Guide language English Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and Italows you to install printer software Driver installation is required for printing Itis recommended that you quit all applications before runing setup powered on WA If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears during the installation procedure click Cancel to close the window 4 Follow the instructions in the installation window KU You can select the software applications in the Select Software to Install Window 1 Introduction EJ Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to reinstall the driver 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers gt your printer driver name gt Uninstall 3 Follow the instructions in the installation window 4 Insert the
79. your convenience If you have any difficulties consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver package Windows applications such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager 1 Software Installation Reinstallation for Linux If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 When the Administrator Login window appears type root in the Login field and enter the system password You must log in as a super user root to uninstall the printer driver If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 3 Open the Terminal program When the Terminal screen appears type in the following root localhost root cd opt Samsung mfp uninstall root localhost uninstall uninstall sh 4 Click Next 5 Click Finish 1 Software Installation 2 Using a Network Connected Machine This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up a network connected machine and software Useful network programs 177 Wired network setup 178 Installing driver over the network 181 IPv6 configuration 189 Wireless network setup 192 Samsung MobilePrint 216 AirPrint 217 Google Cloud Print 219 WA Supported optional devices and features may differ according to your model see Features by models on page 5 Useful network programs There are several progr
80. 0 RH Power rating 110 volt models AC 110 127V 220 volt models AC 220 240 V 5 Appendix 144 Specifications Items Description Power consumption Average operating mode CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 380 W e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Less than 450 W Ready mode e CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 50 W e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Less than 16 W e CLX 626xFW Series Less than 18 W Power save mode e CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series Less than 1 0 W e CLX 419xFW Series Less than 2 4 W e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Less than 1 0 W e CLX 626xFW Series Less than 2 4 W Power off mode Less than 0 1 W a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested basic machine installation A4 paper simplex printing b See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage V frequency hertz and of current A for your machine c Wireless models only see Features by models on page 5 5 Appendix ga i Specifications Print media specifications Type Plain paper Size Dimensions Tray1 Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 70 to 89 g m 19 to Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 24 Ibs bond US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches A4 210 x 297 mm 8 27 x 11 69 inches 250 sheets of 80 g Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches m 21 Ibs bond JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 17 x 10 12 i
81. 000 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings Click Raw TCP IP LPR IPP or mDNS You can enable the IPP protocol or mDNS protocol Printing via AirPrint For example the iPad manual provides these instructions A W N Open your email photo web page or document you want to print Touch the action icon EE Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up Touch Print button Print it out 2 Using a Network Connected Machine AirPrint KA Cancelling print job To cancel the printing job or view the print summary click the print center icon in multitasking area You can click cancel in the print center 2 Using a Network Connected Machine gg Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your smart phone tablet or any other web connected devices Just register your Google account with the printer and you are ready to use the Google Cloud Print service You can print your document or email with Chrome OS Chrome browser or a Gmail Google Docs application on your mobile device so you don t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device Refer to the Google website http www google com cloudprint learn or http support google com cloudprint for more information about Google Cloud Print Registering your Google account to the printer 2 e Make sure the printer mac
82. 1 Printer Configuration 2 Port Configuration 5 Useful Management Tools 324 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Printers tab 2 To use the on screen help the Help or button from the window View the current system s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window After changing the configurations click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs Printers and Classes 1 Switches to Printers configuration 2 Shows all of the installed machines 3 Shows the status model name and URI of your machine 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The printer control buttons are as follows Refresh Renews the available machines list Add Printer Allows you to add a new machines Remove Printer Removes the selected machine Set as Default Sets the current selected machine as a default machine Stop Start Stops starts the machine Test Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly Properties Allows you to view and change the printer s properties Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes Printers configuration e Printers Classes Refresh Ss Aga Class Remove Class Set as Detauit 2a class State idle P
83. 17 81 x 18 77 inches CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series 469 x 452 5 x 504 3 mm 18 46 x 17 81 x 19 85 inches Weight Machine with consumables e CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series 21 44 Kg 47 27 lbs e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series 24 8 Kg 54 68 Ibs CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series 26 7 Kg 58 86 Ibs Dimension Width x Length x Height 5 Appendix 143 Specifications Items Description Noise Level Ready mode Less than 32 dB A Print mode e CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 50 dB A e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Less than 52 dB A Copy mode Scanner glass e CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 52 dB A e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Less than 54 dB A Document feeder CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 52 dB A e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series Less than 54 dB A e CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Less than 54 dB A Scan mode Scanner glass e CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 52 dB A e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Less than 54 dB A Document feeder CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series Less than 52 dB A e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series Less than 54 dB A e CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Less than 54 dB A Temperature Operation 15 to 30 C 59 to 86 F Storage packed 20 to 50 C 4 to 122 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storage packed 10 to 9
84. 2 Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light temperature and humidity Samsung suggests users follow these recommendations to Handling instructions ensure optimal performance highest quality and longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge Donot touch the surface of the photoconductive drum in the cartridge Store this cartridge in the same environment in which the printer will be used Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock This should be in controlled temperature and humidity conditions The toner cartridge should remain in its original and unopened package until installation if original packaging is not available cover the top opening of the cartridge e Never manually rotate the drum especially in the reverse direction this can cause internal damage and toner spillage with paper and store in a dark cabinet Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf Toner catidac ucade and operating life Do not store on the floor If the toner cartridge is removed g g from the printer follow the instructions below to store the toner cartridge properly Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic store brand refilled or Store the cartridge inside the protective bag from the original package remanufactured toner cartridges St
85. 4 bit Mandriva 2007 2008 2009 2009 1 2010 32 64 bit Ubuntu 6 06 6 10 7 04 7 10 8 04 8 10 9 04 9 10 10 04 32 64 bit SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 32 64 bit Debian 4 0 5 0 32 64 bit CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz Intel Core 2 RAM 512 MB 1 GB Free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB Unix Items Operating system Requirements Sun Solaris 9 10 x86 SPARC HP UX 11 0 11i v1 11i v2 11i v3 PA RISC Itanium IBM AIX 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 Appendix 154 i Specifications Items Requirements Free HDD space Up to 100 MB 5 Appendix 155 Specifications Network environment KU Network and wireless models only see Features by models on page 5 You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine tea Spedficatio0ns SSS SSS SSS S S Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX Wired Lan e 802 11b g n Wireless LAN Network operating system Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e MacOSX 104 10 7 e UNIX OS Network protocols e TCP IPv4 DHCP BOOTP e DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP WSD e SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec e TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec Wireless security e Authentication Open System Shared Key WP
86. 75t090g m 20to 75to90g m2 20to 24 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Pre printed Plain paper lbs bond 24 Ibs bond Ibs bond lbs bond section 250 sheets of 80 g 1 sheet 250 sheets of 80 g m 50 sheets m 21 Ibs bond 21 Ibs bond Not available in optional tray Recycled Refertothe Refer to the Plain paper section 79 to 90 g m 19 to 24 70t0909 m 19to 70to 90 g m 19to24 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Plain paper Ibs bond 24 Ibs bond Ibs bond Ibs bond section i e 250 sheets of80g 1sheet 250 sheets of 80 g m 50 sheets m 21 Ibs bond 21 Ibs bond Transparency Letter Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g m 35to 138 to 146 g m 35 138 to 146 g m 35 to 39 138 to 146 g m 35 to Legal A4 39 Ibs bond to 39 Ibs bond Ibs bond 39 Ibs bond 50 sheets 1 sheet 50 sheets 10 sheets Not available in optional tray Labels 4 Letter Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g m 32to 120 to 150g m2 32 120 to 150g m 32t040 120 to 150 g m 32 to Legal US 40 Ibs bond to 40 Ibs bond lbs bond 40 Ibs bond Folio A4 JIS LI LI e h B5 ISO B5 50 sheets 1 sheet 50 sheets 10 sheets Executive Not available in optional A5 tray 5 Appendix 148 i Specifications Weight Capacity CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series Type Size Dimensions CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Card stock Letter Refer to the Pla
87. A Personal WPA2 Personal PSK e Encryption WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES 5 Appendix 156 Regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements Laser safety statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 2007 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Warning Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons CAUTION CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM LASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN FFEN STRAHLENAUSSETZUNG VERMEIDEN NSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3 B WENN BDECKUNG GE FFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL USSETZEN LASSE 3B RADIZIONI LASER INVISBILI CON IL SPOSITIVO
88. APERTO EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL AGGIO ADIACI N L SER INVISIBLE DE CLASE 3B PRESENTE L ABRIR EVITE LA EXPOSICI N AL HAZ LASSE 3B RADIA O LASER INVIS VEL AO ABRIR VITE EXPOSI O DIRECTA AO FEIXE LASSE 3B ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALING INDIEN EOPEND VERMIJD BLOOTSTELLING AAN DE STRAAL LASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED BNING NDGA UDS TTELSE FOR STR LING LASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTR LING N R DEKSEL PNES UNNG EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN LASS 3B OSYNLIG LASERSTR LNING N R DENNA DEL R PPNAD STR LEN R FARLIG VAROITUS LUOKAN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASER S TEILY AVATTUNA V LT ALTISTUMISTA S TEELLE it CLASS 3B FRIR RRA A NAA aa agla Sa IB 7 Holz HAH ol J SS HA2 DANGER On VORSICHT ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION O BED DVO BEC PERIGO m GEVAAR ADVARSEL ADVARSEL VARNING EA PR CA OA ozone is heavier than air keep the product in a place with good 1G This product s ozone emission rate is under 0 1 ppm Because ventilation 5 Appendix Regulatory information Mercury Safety Recycling Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal Laws U S A only Power saver This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of AGANG KANE time power consumption is automatically lowered
89. Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness FTP Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness SMB Feature Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Scan Setup Change Default USB Default Email Default FTP SMB Default Original Size Original Type Resolution Color Mode File Format Duplex Darkness Server Confirmation Print Setup Orientation Trapping Portrait Off Landscape Medium Copies Maximum Resolution Screen Normal Normal Best Enhanced Clear Text Detailed Minimum Emulation Normal Emulation Type Maximum Setup Off Edge Enhance Off Normal Maximum 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI Menu overview Machine Setup Machine ID Fax Number Date amp Time Clock Mode Language Default Mode Power Save Wakeup Event System Timeout Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Humidity Auto Continue 0 Sec 30 Sec Off Auto CR Auto Tray Switch Paper Substitution Tray Protection Skip Blank Pages PDF Type Stamp Import Setting Export Setting Eco Settings Vapor Mode Off On Auto a CLX 419xFN CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only b CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only c This is an optional feature CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only d CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series only System Setup AutoPowerOff Sound Off Key Sound On Alarm Sound Paper Se
90. EE tem escription Item Description Activates the tray confirmation message If you open and Tray Confirm close a tray a window asking you whether to set the Key Sound paper size and type for the tray just opened appears Turns the key sound on or off A tone sounds each time a key is pressed if this option is on Sets the paper margins for the paper trays Turns the alarm sound on or off An alarm tone sounds i l Alarm Sound when an error occurs or fax communication ends if this Simplex Margin Sets the margin for one sided option is on printing lt Tray X gt lt Duplex Margin Sets the margins for double sided Turns on or off the sounds from the telephone line printing through the speaker such as a dial tone or a fax tone With this option set to Comm which means the speaker Top Margin Sets the top margin P g p g is on until the remote machine answers e Left Margin Sets the left margin K You can adjust the volume level using On Hook Dial You can adjust the speaker volume only Sound Volume when the telephone line is connected Speaker Volume a Press Lifa on the control panel Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or b Press On Hook Dial A dial tone sounds from models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on the speaker page 33 c Press the arrows until you hear the volume you want d Press On Hook Dial to save the chan
91. Galxy S Galaxy 52 Galaxy Tab and Android mobile devices Windows Phone 7 or higher Samsung Focus Omnia7 and OmniaW and Downloading Samsung MobilePrint Windows mobile devices To download Samsung MobilePrint go to the application store Samsung Apps Android Market App Store Marketplace on your mobile device and just search for Samsung MobilePrint You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices or Marketplace for Windows devices on your computer 2 Using a Network Connected Machine BO AirPrint 2 CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series only AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone iPad and iPod touch running the latest version of iOS AirPrint Setting up AirPrint Bonjour mDNS and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods 1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website Type in the ID and Password then click Login If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service type in the below default ID and password We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00
92. LX 626xFD Series only Handset Features by models Features CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series Multi send CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Delay send CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Priority send Duplex send CLX 626xFR Series only Secure receive CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Duplex print CLX 626xFR Series only Send Receive forward fax CLX 419xFN Series only CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Send Receive forward email CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Send Receive forward server CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series only Features Features by models CLX 419xN Series CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series Scanning to email Scanning to SMB server Scanning to FTP server Duplex scan CLX 626xFR Series only Scan to PC Features by models CLX 626xND Series CLX 419xN Series Features CLX 419xEN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFW Series 419x er CLX 626xFR Series ID card copying Reduced or enlarged copying Collation Poster
93. ROM drive 3 Select Install Now fo Install Now 3 View User s Guide Select User s Guide language English It allows you to install printer software Driver installation is required for printing Itis recommended that you quit all applications before runing setup 4 Read License Agreement and select I accept the terms of the License Agreement Then click Next WU If your machine is not found on the network or locally an error message appears Select the option you want and click Next 5 Choose the option in Using Enhanced Features and Participating in Printer Usage Information Collection Program Then click Next 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 181 Installing driver over the network 6 Select Network connection on the Printer Connection Type screen Following command line are effective and operated when command is 7 If the Connect Device window appears check that the machine is used with s or S But h H or are exceptional commands that can be connected to your network Then click Next operated solely T The firewall software might be blocking network communication Before s connecting the device to the network disable the computer s firewall Solan ene li eens BPEL s or Starts silent installation Installs machine drivers 15 without prompting any Uls or 8 The searched machines will be shown on the screen Select the one you user intervention wis
94. S sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs a la seule condition que la somme d indices d equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n excede pas cinq Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual 5 Appendix 162 Regulatory information The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the custom
95. Samsung Printer Status on page 322 If a message is not in the table reboot the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call a service representative When you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message Some messages may not appear on the display depending on the options or models error number indicates the error number tray type indicates the tray number media type indicates the media type media size indicates the media size color indicates the color of toner o mm m ee cr mm unit type indicates the unit type Message Original paper jam inside of scanner Remove jam Original paper jam in front of scanner Meaning The loaded original document has jammed in document feeder Paper Jam related messages Suggested solutions Clear the jam see Clearing original document jams on page 117 Remove jam Paper Jam Paper has jammed Clear the jam see In tray1 on in Tray1 in the tray page 122 Paper Jam Paper has jammed Clear the jam see In optional in Tray2 in the optional tray tray on page 123 Paper Jam Paper has jammed Clear the jam see In the manual in MP Tray inthe multi purpose feeder multi purpose tray on tray page 125 Jam inside machine Paper has jammed in the inside machine Clear the jam see Inside the machine on page 128 Jam inside of duplex Paper has jammed
96. Useful Setting Menus 232 Fax To change the menu options e Press ae fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Sending on the control panel e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax Default on the touch screen e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen Item Redial Times Description Sets the number of redial attempts If you enter 0 the machine will not redial Redial Term Sets the time interval before automatic redialling Sets a prefix of up to five digits This number dials Prefix Dial before any automatic dial number is started It is useful for accessing a PABX exchange Sends faxes using error correction mode ECM to ECM Mode makes sure the faxes are sent smoothly without any error It may take more time Fax Confirmation e Fax Send Confirmation Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission was successfully completed or not LA If you select On Error the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not successful Item Description Select the maximum modem speed you want if the Modem speed phone line fails to sustain a higher modem speed You can select 33 6 28 8 14 4 12 0 9 6 or 4 8 kbps Prints a transmission report with a minimized image of l TCR mage Te the first page of the fax sent Sets the dialing mode to either tone or pulse This Dial Mode setting may not
97. User s Guide CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on windows ADVANCED This guide provides information about installation advanced configuration operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments Some features may not be available depending on models or countries 1 Introduction This chapter provides information you need to know before using the machine Key benefits Features by models Useful to know About this user s guide Safety information Machine overview Control panel overview Turning on the machine Installing the driver locally Reinstalling the driver Key benefits Environmentally friendly Fast on demand printing CLX 419XN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series For single side printing 18 ppm A4 or 19 ppm Letter CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xF R CLX 626xFW Series For single side printing 24 ppm A4 or 25 ppm Letter For duplex printing 12 ppm A4 or 12 ppm Letter To save toner and paper this machine supports Eco feature see Eco printing on page 68 Convenience To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper see Using advanced print features on page 267 To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing see Using advanced print feature
98. W N Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop Double click the MAC Installer folder 5 Uninstaller OS X icon Enter the password and click OK When the uninstall is done click OK If a machine has already been added delete it from the Print Setup Utility or Print amp Fax 1 Software Installation Installation for Linux You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Installing the Unified Linux Driver 1 N Aa UW Kk Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on When the Administrator Login window appears type root in the Login field and enter the system password You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator From the Samsung website download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer Right click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package Double click cdroot gt autorun When the welcome screen appears click Next When the installation is complete click Finish The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for
99. X 626xFW Series When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives Should be stable at your machine s fusing temperature about 170 C 338 F Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series serious jams CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626XFR CLX 626xFW Series Curl Must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction e Inthe software application set the margins to at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray Preprinted paper Glossy Photo When loading preprinted paper the printed side should be facing up with an uncurled edge at the front If you experience problems with paper feeding turn the paper around Note that print quality is not guaranteed CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second about 170 C 338 F Preprinted paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers Before you load preprinted paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinte
100. You can create and save the frequently used settings as a profile list Also you can add and delete the profile and save each profile to a different ath 2 e Accessing menus may differ from model to model p It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for To change the Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt 25 Switch to some models advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings e Ifyou want to scan using the network refer to the Advanced Guide see Scanning from network connected machine on page 283 4 Select the option you want and press OK Scanning begins 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the 5 amis documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 WA Scanned image is saved in computer s C Users users name My Documents The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 2 Select scan gt Scan To PC on the control panel Or select Scan gt Local PC on the touch screen 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup I Basic faxing i This function is not supported for CLX 419xN CLX 626xND Series see Preparing to fax Variety feature on page 8 J e For special faxing features refer to the Advanced Guide see Fax Before you send or receive a fax you need to connect the supplied line cord to features on page 292 y y pp your telephone wall jack see Rear view on page
101. You can set SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Administrator s can use SNMP to monitor and manage machines on the network Http Activate You can sets whether to use SyncThru Web Service or not Turn the power off and on after you change this option SNTP You can set SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol settings SNTP synchronizes the clocks of the computer systems through the Internet NTP so there would not be a time difference when exchanging data UPnP SSDP You can set UPNP protocol WA Turn the power off and on after you change this option MDNS You can set mDNS Multicast Domain Name System settings SetIP You can set SetIP settings 3 Useful Setting Menus 251 System setup SLP Option Description You can configure SLP Service Location Protocol settings This protocol allows host applications to find services in a local area network without prior configuration Turn the power off and on after you change this option 3 Useful Setting Menus 252 Admin setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 Press Setup gt Admin Setup gt Next on the touch screen Item Description You can control user access to a machine You can assign different levels of permissions to use the machine to each user User Access 2 You can al
102. achine see Menu overview on page 33 To change the menu options Press scan gt Menu gt Scan Setup on the control panel Or Scan to gt A Menu gt Scan Setup on the control panel e Orpress Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Scan Default on the touch screen e Orpress Scan gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item Description Destination Enter the destinations information 3 Useful Setting Menus Scan Item Change Default Description Item The scan options can be set to those most frequently used Original Size Sets the image size Original Type Sets the original document s type Resolution Sets the image resolution Color Mode You can select the color options of scan outputs Duplex e Color Uses color to display an image 24 bits per pixel 8 bits for each RGB is used for 1 pixel e Gray Uses the black gradation to display an image 8 bits per pixel Description Selects if the machine scans one side of the paper 1 Sided both sides of the paper 2 Sided or both sides of the paper 2 Sided Rotated e 1Sided For originals that are printed on one side only 2Sided For originals that are printed on both sides e 2Sided Rotated For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees KA If an original is placed on the scanner glass the machine shows the window asking
103. achine in use Some machines do not have this feature 2 Option You can set printing job alert related settings 5 Useful Management Tools ga Using Samsung Printer Status Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide 2 This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide 5 Close Close the window 5 Useful Management Tools 323 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices You need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator see Installation for Linux on page 174 Opening Unified Driver Configurator After the driver is installed on your Linux system the Unified Driver Configurator 1 Double click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop icon will automatically be created on your desktop You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Samsung Unified Driver gt Unified Driver Configurator 2 Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window Unified Driver Configurator Printers configuration Printers Classes ae a e Retesh Add Printer Remove Printor Stop Test Properties Selected printer Local printer idie Model URI
104. ack of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages e The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page e The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture e If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems Or select Thick from the Printing Preferences window see Opening printing preferences on page 66 e Ifbackground scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application orin Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Ensure the correct paper type is selected For example If Thicker Paper is selected but Plain Paper actually used an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem e Ifyou are using a new toner cartridge redistribute the toner first see Redistributing toner on page 95 Toner particles are around bold characters or pictures The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab a
105. agnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative EC Certification Certification to 1999 5 EC Radio Equipment amp Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive FAX This Samsung product has been self certified by Samsung for pan European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone network PSTN in accordance with Directive 1999 5 EC The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the European countries In the event of problems you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd in the first instance The product has been tested against TBR21 To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard the European Telecommunication Standards Institute ETSI has issued an advisory document EG 201 121 which contains notes and additional requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals The product has been designed against and is fully compliant with all of the relevant advisory notes contained in this document 5 Appendix 165 Regulatory information European radio approval information for products fitted with EU approved
106. al goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 5 or Menu overview on page 33 e Ifthe IPv6 network seems to not be working set all the network setting KU Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the to the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting menu on page 33 It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements 1 Select Menu 5 Network 5 TCP IP IPv6 5 IPv6 Activate on the Link local Address Self configured local IPv6 address Address starts with control panel FE80 Or select Setup Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt TCP IP Stateless Address Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network IPv6 gt IPv6 Activate on the touch screen router Stateful Address Pv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server Selec Omane press QK Manual Address Manually configured IPv6 address by a user Turn the machine off and turn it on again In the IPv6 network environment follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address J Wn When you install the printer driver do not configure both IPv4 and IPv6 We recommend to configure either IPv4 or IPv6 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 189 IPv6 configuration DHCPv6 address configuration If you have a DHCPV6 server on your network you can set one of t
107. allation results 1 From the Samsung website download and unpack the UNIX Printer 8 Run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Driver package to your computer Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window referring to the following procedures 2 Acquire root privileges su KA On some UNIX OS for example on Solaris 10 just added printers may not be enabled and or may not accept jobs In this case run the following two Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer commandeon therc t terminal wJ accept lt printer_name gt KA See administration guide of your UNIX OS for details enable zprinter name 4 Unpack the UNIX printer driver package For example on IBM AIX use the following commands gzip d lt enter the package name tar xf 5 Go to the unpacked directory 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Installing driver over the network Uninstalling the printer driver package 4 Specify any printer description in the Description field This is optional Specify the printer location in the Location field Ul 2 The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal 6 Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network connected printers On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type opaning Uninstall Printer wizard only the DNS
108. als the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode or inserts a pause into a fax number in edit mode see Redialing the fax number on page 292 Multi Send Sends a fax to multiple destinations see Sending a fax to multiple destinations on page 78 K You cannot send a color fax using this feature Delay Send Delayed Send Sets your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present see Delaying a fax transmission on page 294 K You cannot send a color fax using this feature Item Send Forward Receive Forward Description Forwards the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax or PC If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful e See Forwarding a sent fax to another destination on page 295 See Forwarding a received fax on page 295 Secure Receive Stores the received fax in memory without printing out To print received documents you need to enter the password You can prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people see Receiving in secure receiving mode on page 300 Cancel Job Cancels the delayed fax job which is saved in memory see Canceling a reserved fax job on page 294 Sending setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or page 33 models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on 3
109. ams available to setup the network settings easily in a network environment For the network administrator especially managing several machines on the network is possible Before using the programs below set the IP address first e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 5 SyncThru Web Service The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the following tasks see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 Check the supplies information and status Customize machine settings Set the email notification option When you set this option the machine status toner cartridge shortage or machine error will be sent to a certain person s email automatically Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments SyncThru Web Admin Service Web based machine management solution for network administrators SyncThru Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate internet access Download this program from http solution samsungprinter com SetIP wired network setup This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP IP protocol See IPv4 configuration using SetIP
110. amsung com 7864 only from land line GREECE 30 210 6897691 from mobile and land line GUATEMALA 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com HONDURAS 800 27919267 www samsung com 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk HONG KONG www samsung com hk_en HUNGARY 06 80 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com 3030 8282 INDIA 1800 3000 8282 1800 266 8282 0800 1 12 8888 www samsung com INDONESIA 021 5699 7777 IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com ITALY 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com JAMAICA 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com JAPAN 0120 327 527 www samsung com JORDAN 800 22273 www samsung com KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 GSM 7799 www samsung com KENYA 0800 724 000 www samsung com KOSOVO 381 0113216899 www samsung com KUWAIT 183 2255 www samsung com KYRGYZSTAN 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung com LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 354 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site MALAYSIA 1800 88 9999 Country Region Customer Care Center 1 800 10 SAMSUNG 726 7864 for PLDT 1 800 3 SAMSUNG 726 7864 for Web Site www samsung com www samsung com MACEDONIA 023 207 777 www samsung com MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com MOLDOVA 00 800 500 55 500 www samsung com MONGOLIA www samsung com MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www s
111. amsung com MOROCCO 080 100 2255 www samsung com NIGERIA 0800 726 7864 www samsung com NETHERLANDS BAQO SAMBH NG 0900 7267864 www samsung com 0 10 min NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 786 www samsung com NICARAGUA 00 1800 5077267 www samsung com NORWAY 815 56 480 www samsung com OMAN 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com PANAMA 800 7267 www samsung com PERU 0 800 777 08 www samsung com PHILIPPINES Digitel 1 800 8 SAMSUNG 726 7864 for Globe 02 5805777 0 801 1 SAMSUNG 172 678 www samsung com POLAND 48 22 607 93 33 PORTUGAL 808 20 SAMSUNG 808 20 7267 www samsung com PUERTO RICO 1 800 682 3180 www samsung com 08010 SAMSUNG 08010 726 www samsung com 7864 only from landline ROMANIA 40 21 206 01 10 from mobile and land line RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung com SAUDI ARABIA 9200 21230 www samsung com SENEGAL 800 00 0077 www samsung com SERBIA 0700 SAMSUNG 0700 726 7864 www samsung com SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 7864 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 1355 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com Country Region Customer Care Center 0 800 502 000 Web Site www samsung com ua SPAIN 902 1 SAMSUNG 902 172 678 www samsung com UKRAINE www samsu
112. aper tray for long Dust and dirt may accumulate on them resulting in spotty printing e Toavoid smudging caused by fingerprints handle them carefully e To avoid fading do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight e Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled curled or have any torn edges e Donot use transparencies that separate from the backing sheet e Toprevent transparencies from sticking to each other do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are being printed out 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 156 Media and tray e Recommended media Transparency for a color laser printer by Xerox such Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other as 3R 91331 A4 3R 2780 Letter indications of separation e Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels Labels Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause paper jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser printers Donotruna sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine e Donotuselabels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or otherwise damaged Card stock Custom sized paper CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CL
113. ar 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your powered on machine in Bonjour Devices ege D fi k i Ifyou want to scan using TWAIN refer to the Mac OS X10 4 steps 2 Double cle tHe Unified Driver contigurator or your desktop above 3 Click the Ss button to switch to Scanners Configuration For 10 6 10 7 select your device below SHARED 5 Set the scan options on this program 6 Scan and save your scanned image Ifscanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the 4 latest version Image Capture operates properly Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher e For more information refer to the Image Capture s help e You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop 4 Special Features 289 Scan features 4 Select the scanner on the list 8 The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the Preview Pane Unified Driver Configurator Scanners configuration Scanner Properties Ss Click Properties 5 p 9 Drag the pointer to set the image area to be scanned in the Preview 6 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the Pane documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 10 Select the option you want 7 From the Scanner Properties window click Preview 11 CAN GAO HAYS your scanned mage K For
114. ar Text Edge Enhance Trapping Screen Emulation Select Tray 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview c This is an optional feature CLX 626xFW Series only d CLX 419xFW Series only Initial Setup Machine ID Select Country Language Date amp Time Clock Mode Default Mode Sound Volume Power Save Wakeup Event System Timeout Import Setting Export Setting a This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge b CLX 626xFW Series only Setup Toner Status Alert Skip Blank Pages Job Timeout Altitude Adjustment Auto CR Firmware Version PDF Type ImageOverwrite Default Paper Size CLR Empty Msg Image Management Vapor Mode Paper Stacking Humidity Admin Setup User Access Control Authentication Stamp Item Opacity Position Chang Admin Password Firmware Upgrade Troubleshooting Language Document Box System Boxes Stored Print Secured Print Shared Folder Duplex Select Tray Copies Color Mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup G Machine s basic settings 1 Select 2 Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup on the control You can set the machine s settings by using the Device Settings in panel Samsung Easy Printer Manager program Or select Setup Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup on the touch e For Windows and Mac users see Device Settings on page 321 screen For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Pri
115. articipating in Printer Usage Information Collection Program Then click Next Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next After searching the wireless networks a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears Click Advanced Setting K e Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID name you want SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select ad hoc e Channel Select the channel Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network e Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP 128 e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Password Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security enabled Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next e WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128
116. arts a job in black or color mode Start 7 On Hook Dial When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone see Receiving manually in Tel mode on page 298 8 Help Gives detailed information about this machine s menus or status 9 9 Reset Resets the current machine s setup 10 Wireless LED Shows the current status of the wireless network connection see Understanding the status LED on page 134 11 Status LED Indicates the status of your machine see Understanding the status LED on page 134 1 Introduction EI Turning on the machine L Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 Connect the machine to the electricity supply first Turn the power switch on 1 Introduction 20 Installing the driver locally A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive using the cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine s driver see Installing driver over the network on page 181 If the installation window does not appear click Start 5 All programs 5 Accessories gt Run X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents
117. ass to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer 4 Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window 4 Special Features Printing features Unix printing 2 To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver press Properties Some features may not be available depending on models or options It g Press OK to start the print job means that the features are not supported see Features by models on page 5 Changing the machine settings The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various Proceeding the print job print options in printer Properties After installing the printer choose any of the image text or PS files to print The following hot keys may also be used H for Help O for OK A for Apply and C for Cancel 1 Execute printui lt file_name_to_print gt command For example if you are printing document1 General tab printui document Paper Size Set the paper size as A4 Letter or other paper sizes according This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the to your requirements user can select various print options Paper Type Choose the type of the paper Options available in the list box are Printer Default Plain and Thick 2
118. atically print the Network Configuration Report Confirm that all the settings are correct IPv4 configuration using SetIP Mac Before using the SetIP program disable the computer firewall from System Preferences gt Security gt Firewall LA The following instructions may vary from your model 1 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable 2 Insert the Installation CD ROM and open the disk window select MAC Installer gt MAC Printer gt SetIP gt SetIPapplet html 3 Double click the file and Safari will automatically open then select Trust The browser will open the SetIPapplet html page that shows the printer s name and IP address information 4 Click the tt icon third from left in the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window 5 Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wired network setup L Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 and enter it without the colons For example 00 1 5 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951 A8 Select Apply then OK and OK again Quit Safari IPv4 configuration using SetIP Linux Before using the SetIP program disable the computer firewall from System Preferences or Admi
119. ature ang Press tar If the machine set to Eco mode this feature is not available 5 Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows Depending on the model the operating procedure may differ indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid wv hi 1 Press ID Copy on the control panel Or select 3 Menu gt Copy Feature gt Layout gt ID Copy on the control panel Or select Copy gt ID Copy on the touch screen 2 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid 6 Press Start button T 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying KA e If you do not press the Start button only the front side will be copied If the original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic scanning For special scanning features refer to the Advanced Guide see Scan WU If you see Not Available message check the port connection or select features on page 282 Enable Scan from Device Panel in Samsung Easy Printer Manager 5 aa Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings Basic Scanning 3 Select the scan destination you want and press OK Default setting is My Documents This is the normal and usual procedure for scanning originals This is a basic scanning method for USB connected machine 2 e
120. available depending on model or optional goods see Front view on page 21 1 Remove any remaining pages from the document feeder 2 Gently remove the jammed paper from the document feeder 4 Troubleshooting 120 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in scanner duplex path i CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only e Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Front view on page 21 4 Troubleshooting 121 Clearing paper jams 2 To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently In tray1 2 Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 Troubleshooting 122 Ing paper jams Clear In optional tray KU CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only 4 Troubleshooting 123 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting 124 j Clearing paper jams In the manual feeder multi purpose tray CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series 4 Troubleshooting 125 Clearing paper jams CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Se
121. available only when you load originals into the document feeder e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder Press PG fax 5 Fax Feature 5 Duplex on the control panel Or select Fax 5 Select the menu you want 5 Select Duplex from the sub menus gt on the touch screen 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one isde only 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides 2 Sided Rotated For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 KA To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotated load the originals on the DADF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided 4 Special Features 296 i Fax features 3 Receiving a fax in the computer F Thisfeature may not be available depending on model or optional goods A W N Press OK see Features by models on page 5 e To use this feature set the option on the control panel Press amp fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Receive Forward gt Forward to PC gt Forward the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Receive Forward gt
122. ay e The computers s Samsung Printing Status program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is low on toner see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 322 If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner WA Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 A e To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary e Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area e Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package They might scratch the drum of the cartridge If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 3 Maintenance 95 j Redistributing toner 3 Maintenance Replacing the toner cartridge The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K The status LED and the toner related message on the display indicate when each individual toner cartridges should be replaced The com
123. bit WEP encryption key The window showing the wireless network setting appears Check the settings and click Next 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 201 Wireless network setup KA Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer s network configuration is set to DHCP the wireless network setting should also be DHCP Likewise if the computer s network configuration is set to Static the wireless network setting should also be Static If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network setting you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically DHCP For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine For example If the computer s network information is as shown follows IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Then the machine s network information should be as below IP address 169 254 133 43 Subnet Mask 255 255 0
124. ble 6 Troubleshooting 332 Printing problems Condition Possible cause The wrong printer driver was selected Suggested solutions Check the application s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge e See Redistributing toner on page 95 e See Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 The file may have blank pages Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options 2 It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the
125. button 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 221 3 Useful Setting Menus This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine and the method of setting for advanced machine setup Before you begin reading a chapter Print Copy Fax Scan System setup Admin setup Eco Direct USB Before you begin reading a chapter This chapter explains all the features available for this series models to help users easily understand the features You can check the features available for each model in the Basic Guide see Menu overview on page 33 The following are tips for using this chapter The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine s functions These menus can be accessed by pressing Menu Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine For models that do not have the Menu on the control panel this feature is not applicable see Control panel overview on page 24 Some menu names may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models 3 Useful Setting Menus 223 Print Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 To change the menu options e Press 3 Menu gt Print Setup on the control panel e Orpress Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Print Setu
126. certification otherwise the machine might not recognize it A e If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see the user s guide of the USB memory device Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or writing to or reading from USB memory The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by user s misuse 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup GI Using USB memory device Scanning to a USB memory device Scanning 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine 1 Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the menu on page 33 or Control panel overview on page 24 documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for page 60 some models 3 Select scan gt Scan To USB gt OK on the control panel You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB memory Or select Scan gt USB gt Next gt Start on the touch screen device The machine begins scanning After scanning is complete you can remove the USB memory device from the machine Customizing Scan to USB You can specify image size file format or color mode for each scanning to USB
127. ck the WPS option for the current wireless security settings The option name may differ depending on the access point or wireless router you are using Items to prepare Check if the access point or wireless router supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Check if your machine supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Networked computer PIN mode only Choosing your type There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network using the 9 WPS button on the control panel The Push Button Configuration PBC method allows you to connect your machine to a wireless network by pressing both the 5 WPS button on the control panel of your machine and the WPS PBC button on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router respectively The Personal Identification Number PIN method helps you connect your machine to a wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS enabled access point or wireless router Factory default in your machine is PBC mode which is recommended for a typical wireless network environment 9 For models that have the touch screen on the control panel follow the next procedure a Press Setup from the Main screen b Press Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt Wireless gt WPS Settings c Select the setup method you want 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 194 Wireless network setup Mac
128. cription Item Description You can select the default color mode to use for copy Auto Fit Copy Copies image to fit automatically to the paper size jobs i Layout Adjusts the layout format such as ID copy 2 4 up etc e Auto Select this setting to automatically detect whether the scanned document is in color or black ID Copy This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item and white and then select an appropriate color such as business card see ID card copying on page Color Mode setting 73 Color select this setting to print the same as the e Collation Set the machine to sort the copy job For example if you original image color KA l l l l Collation Copy make 2 copies of a 3 page original one complete 3 page Mono Select this setting to print the copy in black document will print followed by a second complete and white regardless whether the scanned document document is in color or in black and white e On Prints output in sets to match the sequence of Allows you to check the current tray settings and originals change the settings if necessary may Auto You can set the machine to automatically to the tray with the same sized paper when the tray in use is empty e Off Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages You can apply the stamp feature i 5 3 1 2 3 A Item Prints the time and date IP address page Cole number device infor
129. ct the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES TKIP AES e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Password Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index 9 The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security settings Enter the Network Password of the access point or router 9 When the network connection window appears disconnect the network cable Then click Next The network cable connection can interfere with searching for wireless devices 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 199 Wireless network setup 10 If your printer supports Wi Fi Direct the following screen appears Click Next Wi Fi Direct Settings Your printer supports Wi Fi Direct z mo Since your printer is a Wi F enabled printer you can use Wi Fi Direct to enable your mobile device to easily connect to your printer Do you want to tum on Wi Fi Direct on your printer Yes I want to tur on WA Drect on my printer Wifi Drect Name 22 characters Password setting 864 characters 2 Can start to build Wi Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager see Setting up Wi Fi Direct on page 210 Wi Fi Direct Name The default Wi Fi Direct Name is the model name and the maximum length is 22 characters e Password setting is the numeric string and the size
130. ction cable between the computerand Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it see Rear view on page 23 the machine is not connected properly The connection cable between the computer and _ If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job the machine is defective You can also try using a different machine cable The port setting is incorrect Check the Windows printer settings to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one 6 Troubleshooting 331 Printing problems Condition The machine does not print Possible cause The machine may be configured incorrectly Suggested solutions Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Uninstall and reinstall the machine s driver The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job Get more hard disk space and print the document again The output tray is full Once the paper is removed from the output tray the machine resumes printing The machine selects print materials fro
131. d Contact a service representative see Available maintenance parts on page 92 Faxes are not received automatically e The receiving mode should be set to fax see Changing the receive modes on page 297 e Make sure that there is paper in the tray see Print media specifications on page 146 e Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem The machine does not send e Make sure that the original is loaded in the document feeder or on the scanner glass e Check the fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality e The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty e A noisy phone line can cause line errors e Check your machine by making a copy e A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 6 Troubleshooting 346 Faxing problems Condition Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched Suggested solutions The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it see Cleaning the scan unit on page 112 The machine dials a number but the connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Soeak w
132. d Machine 208 Wireless network setup 7 Select the one Network Name SSID in the list A Disconnect the network cable standard or network Your machine should then start communicating wirelessly with the network In case of Ad hoc mode you can use a wireless LAN and wired LAN simultaneously SSID SSID Service Set Identifier is a name that identifies a wireless network access points and wireless devices attempting to connect to a specific wireless network must use the same SSID The SSID is case sensitive Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network e Operation Mode Operation Mode refers to the type of wireless 1 0 connections see Wireless network name and network password on page 192 Ad hoc Allows wireless devices to communicate directly with each other in a peer to peer environment Turning the Wi Fi network on off Infrastructure Allows wireless devices to communicate with each other through an access point KA If your machine has a display you can also turn on off the Wi Fi from the machine s control panel using the Network menu 9 If your network s Operation Mode is Infrastructure select the SSID of the access point If the Operation Mode is Ad hoc select the machine s SSID Note that portthru is the default SSID of your machine 1 Check whether the network cable is connected to the machine If not c
133. d paper reducing print quality Recommended media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product Q6611A only Recommended media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy Product Q6616A Setting the paper size and type After loading paper in the paper tray set the paper size and type using the control panel buttons WA e You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Manager program For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager 5 switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Device Settings on page 321 e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 158 Media and tray 1 Select Menu gt System Setup gt Paper Setup gt Paper Size or Paper Type on the control panel Using the output support Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Paper Setup gt select a tray gt Paper Size or Paper Type on the touch screen A The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number 2 Select the tray and the option you want of pages at once Make sure that you do not touch the surface and do not allow children near it 3 Press OK to save the selection 4 Press Stop Clear button or home fag icon to return to ready The printed pages stack on the output support and the output support will help mode th
134. d s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network access Resolution The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution Glossary gg Glossary SMB TCP IP Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices ina WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Subnet Mask
135. d the Stop or Stop Clear button on the control panel for about 5 seconds You can find your machine s PIN Press and hold the 63 WPS button on the control panel for more than 4 seconds until the status LED stays on The machine starts connecting to the access point or wireless router You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is connected to the access point or wireless router The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you enter the eight digit PIN The WPS LED blinks in the order below a The light blinks fast on the WPS LED The machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 196 Wireless network setup Re connecting to a network Disconnecting from a network When the wireless function is off the machine automatically tries to re connect to the access point or wireless router with the previously used wireless connection settings and address WU In the following cases the machine automatically re connects to the wireless network e The machine is turned off and on again The access point or wireless router is turned off and on again Canceling the connection process
136. dd 4 Special Features 265 Printing features KA e For basic printing features refer to the Basic Guide see Basic printing Ifyou want to change the settings for each print job change it in Printing on page 64 Preferences e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 Setting your machine as a default machine Changing the default print settings PAA Windows Stari meni Click the Windows Start menu Select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers Select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers Select your machine If Printing preferences has a B you can select other printer drivers 1 Right click on your machine 4 Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer E connected to the selected printer If Printing preferences has a B you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer 1 2 3 4 Select Printing preferences Change the settings on each tab 5 6 Click OK 4 Special Features 266 Printing features 1 Check the Print to file box in the Print window Using advanced print features General Select Printer KU XPS printer driver used to print XPS file format See Features by models on page 5 e The XPS printer driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or z oa higher Location Comment e Install optional memory when an
137. ding on options or Duplex Margin Sets the margin for double sided models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on panang page 33 e Binding When printing on both sides of the paper Common Margin side A s margin closest to the binding will be the same as side B s margin closest to the binding Likewise the sides margins farthest from the binding will be the same To change the menu options Press Menu gt System Setup gt Paper Setup on the control panel e Top Margin Sets the top margin Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Paper Setup on the touch gt Left Margin Sets the left margin screen Sets the paper margins for emulation print page Emulation Margin e Top Margin Sets the top margin Item Description Left Margin Sets the left margin Paper Size Sets mg paper size as AA Letter or other paper sizes Sets the paper margins in multi purpose tray according to your requirements f Simplex Margin Sets the margin for one sided Paper Type Chooses the type of the paper for each tray printing Paper Source Selects from which tray the paper is used Me may Duplex Margin sets emang ING fordouble sided printing Margin Sets the margins for the document Top Margin Sets the top margin e Left Margin Sets the left margin Manual Feeder Sets the paper margins in manual feeder tray 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup l D ipti
138. dress of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings gt TCP IP IPv6 Selects this option to use the newark environment Network Settings see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 through IPv6 see IPv6 configuration on page 189 Configure the network transmission speed e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Network on the control panel Ethernet Speed e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup on the touch Turn the power off and on after you change this screen option You can selects the user authentication for network 802 1x communication For detailed information consult the network administrator Wireless Selects this option to use the wireless network 3 Useful Setting Menus 250 System setup Option Clear Settings Description Reverts the network settings to the default values Turn the power off and on after you change this option Network Configuration This list shows information on your machine s network connection and configuration Option WINS Description You can configure the WINS server WINS Windows Internet Name Service is used in the Windows operating system K Turn the power off and on after you change this option Net Activate Ethernet Activate You can sets whether to use Ethernet on or off Turn the power off and on after you change this option SNMP V1 V2
139. e Firmware Version Shows the product s firmware version Tray Protection Decides to use or not use the Auto tray switch feature If you set tray 1 to On for example then tray 1 is excluded during tray switching This setting works for copy or print jobs It doesn t affect fax jobs 3 Useful Setting Menus 242 System setup Item PDF Type Description Allows you to select the PDF type when saving the data as a PDF file Standard Saves the data as a regular PDF e PDF A Saves the data as a PDF that has the necessary information to render itself in any environment KA PDF A file must be self contained it cannot rely on another application to render fonts open hyperlinks or execute scripts audio files or video files Item CLR Empty Msg Description When toner cartridge is empty this option appears You can clear the empty message Troubleshooting Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error Stamp You can apply the stamp feature Item Prints the time and date IP address page number device information or user ID to the copy output e Opacity You can select the transparency Position Sets the position Eco Settings Allows you to save print resources and enables eco friendly printing e Default Mode Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off WA On force On Forced Sets the Eco mode on with password If a
140. e the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely 3 Maintenance 114 4 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error Tips for avoiding paper jams 116 Clearing original document jams 117 Clearing paper jams 122 Understanding the status LED 134 Understanding display messages 136 WA This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error If your machine has a display screen check the message on the display screen first to solve the error If you cannot find a solution to your problem in this chapter refer to the Troubleshooting chapter in the Advanced Guide see Troubleshooting on page 328 If you cannot find a solution in the User s Guide or the problem persists call for service i Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media s most paper jams can be avoided To avoid paper jams refer to the following guidelines Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Tray overview on page 48 Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix papers in a tray Use only recommended print media see Print media specifications on pag
141. e 146 4 Troubleshooting 116 Clearing original document jams When an original document jams in the document feeder a warning message appears on the display A To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and carefully a To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper originals si 4 Troubleshooting Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in front of scanner Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 8 4 Troubleshooting 118 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam inside of scanner Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 8 4 Troubleshooting 119 Clearing original document jams Original paper jam in exit area of scanner Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 e This troubleshooting may not be
142. e a Next gt Cancel 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 204 Wireless network setup Ad hoc via USB cable If you do not have an access point AP you may still connect the machine wirelessly to your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following these simple directions Items to prepare e Network connected computer Software CD that was provided with your machine A machine installed with a wireless network interface e USBcable Creating the ad hoc network in Mac Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine Turn on your computer and the wireless network machine Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the MAC Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon Click Continue 1 2 4 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop 5 7 Read the license agreement and click Continue 10 11 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement When the message that warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane After searching the wireless networks a list of wireless networks your machine has searched appears Click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID name SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select ad hoc e Channel Select the channel Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz e Authentication Se
143. e error look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part see Understanding display messages on page 136 You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers s Samsung Printing Status window see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 322 e Ifthe problem persists call a service representative LED Status Description 5 off l The machine is off line Blinking When the backlight blinks the machine is receiving or printing data ai On e The machine is on line and can be used A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message When the problem is cleared the machine resumes Blinking Small amount of toner is left in the cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page Status p 95 Red e A toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 e The cover is opened Close the cover e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message see Understanding display messages on page 136 A paper jam has occurred see Clearing paper jams on page 122
144. e printed pages to align Unfold the output support 2 The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel a To print from an application open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 c Press the Paper tab and select an appropriate paper e Ifyou want to use special sized paper such as billing paper select the Paper tab gt Size gt Edit and set Custom Paper Size Settings in the Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 KU Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 15o Media and tray Do not load paper smaller than 142 x 148 mm 5 6 x 5 8 inches or larger than You can use the scanner glass or the document feeder to load an original for 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches copying scanning and sending a fax Do not attempt to load the following s of paper in order to prevent paper Jam OW print quality and machine amage KU Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending Carbon paper or carbon backed paper on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 Coated paper Onion skin or thin paper Wrinkled or creased paper On the scanner glass Curled or r
145. e printers list Look at the description in the Selected printer pane If its status contains Stopped press the Start button Normal operation of the machine should be restored The stopped status might be activated when some problems in printing occur e Check if your application has special print options such as oraw If oraw is specified in the command line parameter then remove it to print properly For Gimp front end select print gt Setup printer and edit the command line parameter in the command item Some colorimagescomeoutall This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 05 when the base color space of the document is indexed color black space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 7 06 or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com Some color images come outin This is a known bug in Ghostscript until GNU Ghostscript version 7 xx when the base color space of the document is indexed RGB unexpected color color space and it is converted through CIE color space Because Postscript uses CIE color space for Color Matching System you should upgrade Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU Ghostscript version 8 xx or later You can find recent Ghostscript versions at www ghostscript com The machine d
146. easily print your captured screen as captured or edited 5 Useful Management Tools 306 Samsung Easy Color Manager Samsung Easy Color Manager helps users do fine adjustments with 6 color tones and other properties such as brightness contrast and saturation Color tone change can be saved as a profile and can be used from the driver or from inside of the machine KA e Available for Windows and Mac OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 5 Helps Samsung color laser printer users to adjust color as they like Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 5 Useful Management Tools Samsung AnyWeb Print K e Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 5 This tool helps you screen capture preview scrap and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 5 Useful Management Tools gg Easy Eco Driver This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 5 Available for Windows OS users only see Software on page 5 Wit
147. eatures and Participating in Printer Usage Information Collection Program Then click Next an 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 198 Wireless network setup 7 Select Configure the wireless network connection using USB cable on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next After searching the window shows the wireless network devices Select the name SSID of the access point you want to use and click Next If the wireless network is already set up the Wireless Network Information window appears Select I want to install software with the current settings Recommended Then click Next If you cannot find the network name you want to choose or if you want to set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting e Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID of the access point SSID is case sensitive e Operation Mode Select Infrastructure e Authentication Select an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based on a WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret key generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase which is manually configured on the access point and each of its clients e Encryption Sele
148. eception at the bottom of each page of a received fax Initiates fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the EXT socket on the back of the Rcv Start Code machine If you pick up the extension phone and hear fax tones enter the code It is preset to 9 at the factory Auto Reduction Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine Discard Size Discards a specific length from the end of the received fax Prints the received fax data on both sides of the paper You can save the paper usage Off Prints only one side of the paper e Long Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the long edge Short Edge Prints both sides of the paper however the binding will be the short edge 3 Useful Setting Menus 234 Fax Change Default setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 To change the menu options Press 45 fax gt B Menu gt Fax Setup gt Change Default on the control panel Item Description The fax options can be set to those most frequently Ch Default ange Defau ised 3 Useful Setting Menus 235 Item Description Scan feature FTP Feature Sets scan destination to an FTP server You scan the FTP Default originals and send the scanned image to an FTP server see Scanning to
149. ect Copy gt Basic Copy gt Fe settings gt Darkness on the touch panel poner Or select Copy gt Basic Copy gt Fe settings gt Original Type on the a h screen 2 Select the option you want and press OK touch scree For example the Light 5 being the lightest and the Dark 5 being the 2 Select the option you want and press OK darkest Ka ae Text Use for originals containing mostly text 2 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready Text Photo Use for originals with mixed text and photographs mode 2 If texts in the printout is blurry select Text to get the clear texts Original Type Photo Use when the originals are photographs The original setting is used to improve the copy quality by selecting the document for the current copy job Magazine Use when the originals are magazines 3 Press Stop Clear button or home fay icon to return to ready mode Reduced or enlarged copy You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 from the document feeder or scanner glass 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying L This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 8 e Ifthe machine set to Eco mode reduce and enlarge features are not available To select from the predefined copy sizes 1 Select copy 5 Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge on the control panel Or select 3 M
150. ect your machine from the Select Printer list a DPwtiotie Peene Duar Find Printer Page Range Al Number of copies 1 Selection Current Page Pages Collate 1 22 33 8m J Cancel app 4 The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window Totake advantage of the advanced printing features click Properties or Preferences from the Print window see Opening printing preferences on page 66 5 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 64 Basic printing Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon a in the Windows task bar You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop or Stop Clear button on the control panel 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Gg Basic printing Opening printing preferences A W N The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user s guide may differ depending on the machine in use e When you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning mark amp or a An 4 mark means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and an amp mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s s
151. ed AA o gt 2 gt 2Sided Description A IB A gt A 2 gt 1Sided Rotated NG gt NG a 3 Useful Setting Menus 229 Copy KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 To change the menu options Press G copy gt Menu gt Copy Setup on the control panel Or Menu gt Copy Setup on the control panel Item Description The copy options can be set to those most frequently h faul Change Default ied 3 Useful Setting Menus 230 Fax Item Description Fax Feature The default document settings procedure good results when using typical text based originals However if you Resolution send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax see Resolution on page 79 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 Selects the color mode in which you want to send the fax iane Color Mode To change the menu options e Mono Transmits a fax in black and white Press d fax gt Menu Fax Feature on the control panel Color Transmits a fax in color This function is
152. ediately turn off personal injury or property damage p the power switch and unplug the machine Do not attempt The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of S emergencies that might require the user to pull the plug out This could result in electric shock or fire 8 Do not bend or place heavy objects on the power cord x p Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire O NG Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord do not handle the boa plug with wet hands sa This could result in electric shock or fire 1 Introduction 15 Safety information A Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation remove the power plug from the electrical outlet This could result in electric shock or fire Be careful the paper output area is hot Burns could occur If the machine has been dropped or if the cabinet appears damaged unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet do not attempt to f
153. ee Reduced or enlarged copy on page 72 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or Reduce Enlarge models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on If the machine is set Eco mode reduce and page 33 enlarge features are not available To change the menu options Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is Darkness easier to read when the original contains faint e Press copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel markings and dark images see Darkness on page 71 Or Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel Improves the copy quality by selecting the document Original Type type for the current copy job see Original Type on e Orpress Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Copy Default page 72 on the touch screen You can sets whether to use Auto color on or off e Or press Copy gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen e On Select this setting to automatically detect Auto Color whether the scanned document is in color or black Item Description and white and then select an appropriate color wi f setting Original Size Sets the image size i Basic Copy Copies can be started quickly You can enter the number of copies using the number Copies i keypad Custom Copy Copies can be customized through detailed options 3 Useful Setting Menus 1225 Copy Item Des
154. efault local IP address the default local IP address of the printer for Wi Fi Direct is Access SyncThru Web Service select Settings 5 Network Settings 5 Wireless gt Wi Fi Direct Enable or disable Wi Fi Direct and set other options 192 168 3 1 Group Owner Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi Fi Direct group s owner The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point We recommend activating this option WA e For Linux OS users 7 Print an IP network configuration report to check the output see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 Network Password If your printer is a Group Owner a Network Password is required for other mobile devices to connect to your printer You can configure a network password yourself or can remember the given Network Password that is randomly generated by default Access SyncThru Web Service select Settings gt Network Settings gt Wireless gt Wi Fi Direct Enable or disable Wi Fi Direct From the machine Machines with a display screen Setting up the mobile device After setting up Wi Fi Direct from the printer refer to the user manual of the Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the mobile device you are using to set its Wi Fi Direct menu on page 33 After setting up Wi Fi Direct you need to download the mobile printing application For example Samsung Mobile printer to print from your Select Se
155. el Pentium IlI 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 512 MB 1 25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz Pentium IV 2 GHz 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Windows Vista Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 1 GB 15 GB Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB 2 GB 16 GB Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Server 2008 R2 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz x86 or 1 4 GHz x64 processors 2 GHz or faster 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have administrator rights can install the software e Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine 5 Appendix 152 i Specifications Mac Operating system Requirements Recommended CPU RAM Free HDD space Mac OS X 10 4 Intel processors e 128 MB for a powerPC based Mac 512 MB 1 GB PowerPC G4 G5 e 512 MB for an Intel based Mac 1 GB Mac OS X 10 5 Intel processors 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel processors 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB Mac OS X 10 7 Intel processors 2 GB 4GB 5 Appendix 153 Specifications Linux Items Operating system Requirements Redhat Enterprise Linux WS 4 5 32 64 bit Fedora 5 13 32 64 bit SuSE Linux 10 1 32 bit OpenSuSE 10 2 10 3 11 0 11 1 11 2 32 6
156. elect a printer from the printer list gt right click the printer gt select Properties gt Device Options gt Properties gt Storage Options Then check the Ram Disk option see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Printing secure documents from the control panel K Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 or Control panel overview on page 24 1 Select 3 Menu gt System Setup gt Job Manage gt Secured Job on the control panel Or select DocumentBox gt System Boxes gt Next gt Secured Print on the touch screen 2 Select the document to print 3 Enter the password that you set from the printer driver 4 Print or delete the document 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying Forspecial printing features refer to the Advanced Guide see Copy on A page 225 2 If you need to cancel the copying job during the operation press istop e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the or Stop Clear button and the copying will stop menu on page 33 or Control panel overview on page 24 Changing the settings for each copy Your machine provides default settings for copying so that you can quickly and q Select SF copy gt E Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel easily make a copy Basic copy Or select Menu gt Copy Feature on the control panel m gt Ifyou press the Stop or
157. eless network PIA e See your network administrator or the person that set up your wireless i network for information about your network configuration 14 The wireless network connects according to the network configuration 15 Wireless network set up is completed After installation is finished click Quit Items to prepare 2 After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a Access point machine driver to print from an application see Installation for Mac on Network connected computer page 172 Software CD that was provided with your machine e Amachine installed with a wireless network interface Network cable Using a network cable Printing a network configuration report Machines that do not support the network port will not be able to use this feature see Rear view on page 23 You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration report Your machine is a network compatible machine To enable your machine to SEE PENNA ADENO CONNAN on Tepon on page T a work with your network you will need to perform some configuration procedures 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wireless network setup IP setting using SetIP Program Windows This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine The MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network inte
158. eless signal including a microwave oven and some Bluetooth devices Whenever the configuration of your access point or wireless router changes you must do the product s wireless network setup again The maximum number of device that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is 3 e If Wi Fi Direct is ON the connection between the AP and the machine will be the 802 11 b g interface 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 215 Samsung MobilePrint What is Samsung MobilePrint Supported Mobile OS Samsung MobilePrint is a free application that enables users to print photos e Android OS 2 1 or higher documents and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet Samsung 0S 4 0 or higher MobilePrint is not only compatible with your Android Windows and iOS smart phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC It connects your mobile Windows Phone 7 or higher device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi Fi access point Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn t necessary just simply install the Samsung MobilePrint application and it will automatically detect compatible Samsung printers Besides printing photos web pages and PDFs scanning is also supported If you have Samsung multfunction printer scan any document into a JPG PDF or PNG format for quick and easy viewing on your mobile device iOS 4 0 or higher iPod Touch iPhone iPad Android 2 1 or higher
159. ent file 1 3 Enter lpr lt file_name gt from the Linux shell command line and press Enter The LPR GUI window appears When you type only lpr and press Enter the Select file s to print window appears first Just select any files you want to print and click Open In the LPR GUI window select your machine from the list and change the print job properties Click OK to start printing Configuring Printer Properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration Open the Unified Driver Configurator If necessary switch to Printers configuration Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties The Printer Properties window appears The following five tabs display at the top of the window General Allows you to change the printer location and name The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration Connection Allows you to view or select another port If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use you must re configure the machine port in this tab Driver Allows you to view or select another machine driver By clicking Options you can set the default device options Jobs Shows the list of print jobs Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list Classes Shows the class that your machine is in Click Add to Cl
160. enu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge on the control panel Or select Copy gt Custom Copy gt Fe settings gt Reduce Enlarge on the touch screen Select the option you want and press OK Press Stop Clear button or home ffag icon to return to ready mode To scale the copy by directly entering the scale rate 1 Select copy gt Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge gt Custom on the control panel Or select Menu gt Copy Feature gt Reduce Enlarge gt Custom on the control panel Or select Copy gt Custom Copy gt Fe settings gt Reduce Enlarge gt Custom on the touch screen 2 Enter the copy size you want using the numeric keypad 3 Press OK to save the selection 4 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode 2 When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy ID card copying Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Basic copying The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and 3 Place Front Side and Press Start appears on the display the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card 4 Press Start Your machine begins scanning the front side and shows Place Back Side nd Pr rt The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this fe
161. epending on operating system you are using e For Windows Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager a Samsung Easy Printer Manager samawg Easy Printer Manager Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung 7 machine settings into one location Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments settings actions and launching All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user to choose from the basic user interface and the advanced user interface Switching between the two interfaces is easy just click a button Supplies Toner Toner ID Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager 6 Order Supplies 2 To open the program For Windows Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your Select Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung 1 computer and network printers added by network Easy Printer Manager gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager discovery Windows only For Mac Open the Applications folder gt Samsung folder gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer information This area gives you general information about your machine You can checkinformation such as the machine s
162. er shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing several s of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEO TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company A FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to th
163. er serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it Contact manufacturer for service Only use drivers approved for the country in which the device will be used See the manufacturer System Restoration Kit or contact manufacturer Technical Support for additional information 5 Appendix Regulatory information China only Pin PAKA SW RICAN ARR E HEHEHHE mn a x s woe sce smx Pb Hg Cd Cr PBB PBDE ab o o o o o o rhe HU x o o o o o Eni st Bh PCA x o o o o o BERR x o o o o o HUA X O O O O O Hpi Ae X O O O O O BURR x o o o o o Farat x o o o o o re al x 6 2 2 FARUX CCD WRA X X O O 0 O HRB see URE x o o o o 6 ED BRAKE PBA x o o o o o mb o o o o o o a o o o o o o O RREA BA Ie AR TATU RL bY RE SJIT 11363 2006 Ha RE EHO BERDIF X KABA BAT SEDARE KAHA IN SEA Hh SJIT 11363 2006 NEREK MERI ELTA ih ASAE AW RELL AEE ELLA NG ARE OAS TI ITT AER RS IOAN PE EE Te Jk REPEL EA RERE PRIN ICH BE Hi AA IS HAWE SUT 11363 2006 bre iit ARIS 5 Appendix 168 Copyright 2012 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for information purposes only All information included here
164. erview Direct USB Print From Auto Fit Copies Duplex Select Tray Color Mode Scan to USB Original Type Original Size Resolution Color Mode File Name File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Darkness File Policy File Manage Show Space a CLX 626xFW Series only Machine Setup Default Setting Copy Default Scan Default Fax Default Paper Setup Tray1 Tray2 MP Tray Manual Feeder Margin Tray Behaviour Auto Tray Switch Auto Continue Paper Substitution Tray Protection Address Book PhoneBook Email Print Reset Reports Configuration Supplies Information Demo Page Help List Address Book Fax Send Confirmation Fax Sent Email Sent Fax Received Fax Schedule Jobs Network Configuration PCL Font List PS Font List Usage Counter b This option appears only when the File Format option is PDF type Setup Account Fax Setup Send Forward Receive Forward Toll Save Secure Receive Prefix Dial Stmp Rcvd Name ECM Mode Modem Speed Image TCR Setup Wizard Network Setup Ethernet Speed TCP IP IPv4 TCP IP IPv6 802 1x Ethernet Activate Http Activate WINS SNMP V1 V2 SNTP UPnP SSDP MDNS SetIP SLP Wireless Wi Fi ON OFF Wi Fi Direct Wi Fi Direct On Off Device Name IP Address Group Owner Network Key Status WPS Settings Connect via PBC Connect via PIN WLAN Settings WLAN Defaults WLAN Signal Clear Settings Print Setup Orientation Copies Resolution Cle
165. es you to restart your computer Click Continue Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Installation Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop 1 3 After the installation is finished click Quit or Restart Double click the MAC Installer folder 5 Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue N AQ uw BW N Click Agree to agree to the license agreement 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 184 Installing driver over the network 14 15 16 Et 18 19 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities gt Print Setup Utility For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax Click Add on the Printer List For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 click the icon A display window will pop up For Mac OS X 10 4 click IP Printer For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 click IP Select HP Jetdirect Socket in Protocol When printing a document containing many pages printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option Enter the machine s IP address in the Address input field Enter the queue name in the Queue input field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first 20 For Mac OS X 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 if Auto Selec
166. escription A Views the file list from the File Navigation Select a file Print From to print Sets scan destination to a USB You scan the originals Scan to USB 7 and save the scanned image to a USB device File Manage Views the file list from the File Navigation Select a file g to delete You can format the USB device Show Space Shows the remaining space 3 Useful Setting Menus 255 4 Special Features This chapter explains special copying scanning faxing and printing features Altitude adjustment Storing email address Entering various characters Setting up the fax address book Registering authorized users Printing features Scan features Fax features Using shared folder features Using optional device features r The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7 e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Altitude adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level The following information will guide you on how to set your machine for the best print quality Before you set the altitude value determine the altitude where you are 4 000m 28k 13 123 ft 3 000 m 9 842 ft 2 000 m 6 561 ft 1 000 m 3 T 3 280 ft A 4 0 CITI 1 High3 2 High2 3 High1 4 Normal You can set the altitude value from Device Settings in Samsung Easy Printer Mana
167. especially intended for two sided originals You can select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax Default on the touch screen e Or press Fax gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side e Orpress Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup on the touch screen only e 2 Sided For originals that are printed on both sides 2 Sided Rotated For originals that are printed on Item Description p Duplex both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees Original Size Sets the image size Original Type Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the 2 To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided Rotated load the original document being scanned originals on the DADF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes the option to 1 Sided Adjusts the brightness level to scan an original that is Darkness easier to read when the original contains faint markings and dark images see Darkness on page 80 Memory Send Fax can be customized through detailed options 3 Useful Setting Menus 231 Fax Item On Hook Dial Description Access a dial tone to send fax Speed Dial Send Fax image to destination from speed dial list Group Dial Send Fax image to destination from group dial list Redial Redi
168. etting or environment Open the document you want to print Select Print from the file menu The Print window appears Select your machine from the Select Printer Click Properties or Preferences 9 The screenshot may differ depending on model Printing Preferences x Favorites Basic Paper Graphics Advanced Eco Samsung Preview Details Last Used Setting A4 mm e This favorite enables you to print with last used settings 210 x 297 mm inch z Normal Printing am This tavorite enables you to print with all factory default settings Pal Double Sided Printing 4 This favorite enables you to save paper by printing on double sides of a sheet mw sais 2 in 1 Printing This favorite enables you to save paper by printing 2 pages on one side of a sheet ra Booklet Printing Hila favorite enables you to lay out a document as a booklet ormat ral Secure Printing A This favorite enables you to print as confidential in print mode Delete C a Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job Printer Status Cancel You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing see Easy Eco Driver on page 309 You can check the machine s current status pressing the Printer Status button see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 322 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 66 Basic printing Using a favorite setting
169. etween a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots Mass storage device Mass storage device commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the mo
170. faxes in memory Since your machine is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing If you receive a fax while you are copying or printing your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory Then as soon as you finish copying or printing the machine automatically prints the fax If fax is received and being printed other copy and print jobs cannot be processed at the same time 4 Special Features 301 Using shared folder features This feature allows you to use the machine s memory as a shared folder The advantage of this feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder Using the shared folder through your computer s window You can use the shared folder in the same way exactly like the normal computer This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods Create edit and delete the folder or file as a normal Windows folder You also V see Features by models on page 5 store the scanned data in the shared folder You can directly print files stored on You can use this feature in the models that have a mass storage device a the shared folder You can print TIFF JPEG and PRN files see Variety feature on page 8 e The administrator can set the ID and password to restrict the user s access and also set the maximum number of simultaneous users Creating a shared folder 1 Open the Windows Explore window from the computer 2 Enter t
171. fier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e g 00 00 0c 34 1 1 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks MFP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU TT 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information MR Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted Glossary ga Glossary NetWare OSI A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking
172. ge and To change the menu options return to ready mode e Press 2 Menu gt System Setup gt Sound on the control panel yey P p p Adjusts the dial tone volume You can select different Dial Tone volume e Or press Setup gt Machine Setup Next gt Initial Setup gt Sound Volume levels on the touch screen Ring Volume Adjusts the ring volume You can select different levels 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on To change the menu options page 33 Press Menu gt System Setup gt Report on the control panel Or press Setup gt Machine Setup Next gt Reports on the touch screen Item Configuration Description Prints a report on the machine s overall configuration Item Fax Sent Description Prints information on the faxes you have recently sent Fax Received Prints information on the faxes you have recently received Email Sent Prints information on the emails you have recently sent e Fax Scheduled Jobs e Fax Schedule Jobs Prints the document list currently stored for delayed faxes along with the starting time and type of each operation Network Configuration Prints information on your machine s network connection and configuration PCL Font List Prints the PCL font list PS Font Li
173. ge continuous color cartridge yield Apporx 1 500 standard pages Yellow Magenta CLT Y506S Yellow CLX 626xFR Series 858 CY2N CLT MS506S Magenta CLX 626xFW Series e CLT C506S Cyan e Average continuous black cartridge yield Apporx 6 000 standard pages Black e CLT K506L Black e Average continuous color cartridge yield Apporx 3 500 standard pages Yellow Magenta CLT Y506L Yellow Cyan e CLT M506L Magenta e CLT C506L Cyan Waste toner CLX 419xN Series Apporx 14 000 standard pages Black CLT W504 container CLX 419xFN Series Apporx 3 500 standard pages Yellow Magenta Cyan CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND Series CLT W506 CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series a Declared yield value in accordance with ISO IEC 19798 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment printing interval graphics media type and media size 3 Maintenance 8o j Available consumables L A Depending on the options percentage of image area and job mode used the toner cartridge s lifespan may differ When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using Otherwise new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions Samsung does not recommend using non genuine Samsung toner cartrid
174. ge such as refilled or remanufactured toner Samsung cannot guarantee non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine s warranty 3 Maintenance EJ Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s performance and capacity 9 e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 5 Accessory Function Memory module Extends your machine s memory capacity Optional tray If you are experiencing frequent paper supply problems you can attach an additional 520 sheet tray IEEE 1284B parallel Allows you to use various interface Connector E e When installing the printer driver with an IEEE1284B parallel connector the machine might not be found and after installing the printer driver only basic printing features are available e Ifyou want to check the machine s status or set the settings connect the machine to a computer with a USB cable or a network e Ifyou use the IEEE 1284B parallel connector you can not use the USB cable a Plain paper 80 g m2 20 Ib bond Part name CLX 419xN CLX 41 9xFN CLX 419xFW Series ML MEM370 512 MB CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xF R CLX 626xFW Series ML MEM380 1 024 MB CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series CLP S680A CLX 626xND
175. ger program e For Windows and Mac users you set from Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings see Device Settings on page 321 Ifyour machine is connected to the network you can set the altitude via SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 You can also set the altitude in System Setup option on the machine s display see Machine s basic settings on page 46 4 Special Features Storing email address This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 You can set up address book with the email addresses you use frequently via SyncThru Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book Storing on your machine To scan and send an image as an email attachment you need to set up email address using SyncThru Web Service 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 2 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 3 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 4 Click Address Book gt Individual gt Add 5 Select the Speed No and enter e mail address and fax number KA If you need to set SMB or FTP sever informat
176. gt Memory Send gt Fe settings on the touch screen 3 DSL modem Telephone line see Rear view on page 23 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs see Adjusting the document settings on page 79 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup I Basic faxing 4 Enter the destination fax number see Keypad letters and numbers on page 260 Press Start on the control panel The machine starts to scan and send the fax to the destinations If you want to send a fax directly from your computer use Samsung Network PC Fax see Sending a fax in the computer on page 293 When you want to cancel a fax job press stop or Stop Clear button before the machine starts transmission If you used the scanner glass the machine shows the message asking to place another page Sending a fax manually Perform the following to send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Select L fax on the control panel Or select Fax gt On Hook Dial gt Fe settings on the touch screen 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs see Adjusting the document settings on page 79 4 Press On Hook Dial on the control panel or lift the handset Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel VI 6 Press Sta
177. h the Easy Eco Driver you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing To use this application Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the printer properties should be checked Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts changing fonts and more You can save frequently used settings as a preset How to use 1 Open a document to print 2 Print the document A preview window appears 3 Select the options you want to apply to the document You can see the preview of the applied features 4 Click Print 5 Useful Management Tools 309 Using SyncThru Web Service 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 2 e Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for SyncThru Web Service 2 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to e SyncThru Web Service explanation in this user s guide may differ from change the default password for security reasons hine d di its opti dels your machine depending on its options or models iDisdmin e Network model only see Software on page 5 Password sec00000 Accessing SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Web Service overview 1 Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows fi Information Settings Security Maintenance Enter the machine IP address of your printer http xxx xxx XXxX XXX in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go
178. h to use and click OK p lt port name gt or Specifies printer port Printer port name can be Q Follow the instructions in the installation window P lt port names specified as IP address hostname USB local port KU Network Portwillbe name or IEEE1284 port name created by use of Standard TCP IP Port monitor For P XXX XXX XXX XXX N where XXX XXX XXX XXX means IP address for Silent installation Mode For example Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user local port this port intervention Once you start the installation the machine driver and software must exist on are automatically installed on you computer You can start the silent installation system before network printer by typing s or S in the command window being specified by p USBOOT P LPT1 p hostname command Command line Parameters Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 182 Installing driver over the network Command line a lt dest_path gt or A lt dest_path gt Definition Specifies destination path for installation L all The destination path should be a fully qualified path Description Since machine drivers should beinstalled on the OS specific location this command applies to only application software Command line xor X
179. he emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse When you change or examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine 5 The wires in the mains lead have the following color code e Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following
180. he following options for default dynamic host configuration 2 Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Select Menu gt Network gt TCP IP IPv6 gt DHCPv6 Config on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt TCP IP IPv6 gt DHCPv6 Config on the touch screen Press OK to select the required value you want DHCPv6 address Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request DHCPv6 Off Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request Router Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router From the SyncThru Web Service Activating IPv6 N OQ wl Kk Access a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator Type in the below default ID and password We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens move the mouse cursor over the Settings of the top menu bar and then click Network Settings Click TCP IPv6 on the left pane of the website Check the IPv6 Protocol check box to activate IPv6 Click the Apply button Turn the machine off
181. he printer s WW ip address example WW169 254 133 42 in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go 3 Create a new folder under nfsroot directory 4 Special Features 302 Using optional device features 3 Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only e Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported see Variety feature on page 8 From the printer driver If you install the optional device you can use advanced printing features such as proofing a job and printing a private job in the Print window Check the mass storage or RAM disk option in Device Options then you can select the various features from Print Mode see Setting Device Options on page 102 5 Click the each tab then select Print Mode 4 Click Properties or Preferences 1 Open the document you want to print 6 Select the option you want see Understanding special printer features on page 268 2 Select Print from the File menu The Print window appears 7 Select OK From the control panel If your machine has optional memory or an optional hard drive you can use these features from the Menu button gt System Setup gt Job Manage 4 Special Features 1303 Using optional device features Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicab
182. heets e 5 sheets e Optional tray 50 sheets Refer to the Plain paper section 176 to 220 g m 47 to 176t0220g m2 47 176to220g m2 47to59 176 to 220 g m 47 to 59 Ibs bond to 59 Ibs bond Ibs bond 59 Ibs bond e 30sheets e sheet Tray1 30 sheets e 5sheets e Optional tray 50 sheets Minimum size custom e Tray1 98x 127mm 3 86x5 60t0220g m2 16to 60to220g m2 16 60to220g m2 16to 60 to 220 g m 16 to inches e Optional tray 148 5 x 210 mm 5 85 x 8 27inches Multi Purpose tray Manual Feeder 76 x 127 mm 3x5 inches Maximum size custom 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches 59 Ibs bond a Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions to 59 Ibs bond 59 Ibs bond for tray1 60 to 163 g m 16 to 43 Ibs bond for optional tray 59 Ibs bond 5 Appendix 150 Specifications b Post card 4 x 6 is supported for tray1 Manual feeder or Multi purpose tray c Index card 3x5 is supported for Manual feeder and Multi purpose tray d The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 sheffield This means the numeric level of smoothness 5 Appendix 151 i Specifications System requirements Microsoft Windows Operating system Requirement recommended CPU RAM free HDD space Windows XP Intel Pentium Ill 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 256 MB 1 5 GB Windows Server 2003 Int
183. hine is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet You should create your Google account in the advance Open the Chrome browser Visit www google com Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address A W N Enter your printer s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service website If it s your first time logging into SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator Type in the below default ID and Password We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 If the network environment is using a proxy server you need to configure the proxy s IP and port number from Settings gt Network Settings gt Google Cloud Print gt Proxy Setting Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Network Settings gt Google Cloud Print Enter your printer s name and description Click Register The confirmation pop up window appears If you set the browser to block pop ups the confirmation window will not appear Allow the site to show pop ups 2 Using a Network Connected Machine gg Google Cloud Print 10 Click Finish printer registration 1 Install the Cloud Print application on yo
184. hines with a display or touch screen Connecting in PIN mode 1 For models that have the touch screen on the control panel press Setup Connecting in PBC mode gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt Wireless gt WPS Settings 1 For models that have the touch screen on the control panel press Setup 2 Press PIN or Connect via PIN gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt Wireless gt WPS Settings 3 Press OK when the confirmation window appears 2 Press PBC or Connect via PBC 4 The eight digit PIN appears on the display 3 Press OK when the confirmation window appears You need to enter the eight digit PIN within two minutes on the Information window appears showing 2 minutes connection processing computer that is connected to the access point or wireless router ume The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below 4 Press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router a Connecting The machine is connecting to the wireless network b Connected When the machine is successfully connected to the The messages are displayed on the display screen in the order below wireless network the WPS LED light stays on a Connecting The machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router c SSID Type After completing the wireless network connection process the AP s SSID information is displayed on the LCD display b Connected When the machine is successfully connected
185. his tab allows you to set system and network security information You need to log in as an administrator to view this tab System Security Sets the system administrator s information and also enables or disables machine features e Network Security Sets settings for HTTPs IPSec IPv4 IPv6 filtering 802 1x and Authentication servers User Access Control Classifies users into several groups according to each user s role Each user s authorization authentication and accounting will be controlled by the group s role definition System Log The System Log contains settings related to logs of device events CLX 626xFW Series only lay Log Configuration The Log Configuration section contains settings related to saving logs Log Viewer The Log Viewer section contains options to view logs stored locally on the device Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting contact information for sending emails You can also connect to Samsung website or download drivers by selecting the Link menu Firmware Upgrade Upgrade your machine s firmware Contact Information Shows the contact information Link Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check information License Management License Management provides settings Installed applications and application licenses 5 Useful Management Tools 311 Using SyncThru Web Service Cloning You can import or ex
186. ick Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview to find a device image 9 6 Select to Save to Location Send to E mail or Send to SNS Click Search Now to automatically search for all devices to which you have access 7 Click on Save Saving a Scan Send E mailing a Scan or Share Uploading WA If there is room on the document glass more than one item can be scanned Click the Help 2 button from the upper right corner of the window and A g click on any option you want to know about at the same time Use the tool to make multiple selection areas cure Scanning Scanning Configuring Quick Scan To set up the Quick Scan options 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on 1 page 60 Click Configuration from the home screen 2 Click on Default to use the default settings or select your own options Click Scan from the home screen 2 3 Click Apply to save changes 3 Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start 4 Make adjustments to the image Scan Settings and More Options 5 Useful Management Tools BO Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Using Quick Scan 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Click Quick Scan from the home
187. iginal is placed on the scanner glass select Yes to add another page Load another original and press OK When you have finished select No when Another Page appears Confirming a transmission When the last page of your original has been sent successfully the machine beeps and returns to ready mode When something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the display If you receive an error message press Stop or Stop Clear to clear the message and try to send the fax again 4 Special Features 292 i Fax features 5 Enter the recipients numbers and select the option KA You can set your machine to print a confirmation report automatically each Fax Options time sending a fax is completed Press pi fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Sending gt Fax Confirmation on the control panel Sending a fax in the computer 2 e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed This program will be installed when you installed the printer driver K Select the Help menu or click the 7 button from the window and click on any option you want to know about 1 Open the document to be sent 2 Select Print from the File menu 6 Click Send The Print window will be disp
188. in is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide Samsung and the Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Microsoft Internet Explorer Excel Word PowerPoint and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Google Picasa Google Cloud Print Google Docs Android and Gmail are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc iPad iPhone iPod touch Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information REV 1 03 5 Appendix 169 User s Guide CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series CLX 626xFW Series ADVANCED This guide provides information about installation advanced configuration operation and troubleshooting on various OS environments Some features may not be available depending on models or countries BASIC This guide provides
189. in paper section 121 to 163 g m 32to 121 to 163g m 32 121to0163g m2 32t043 121 to 163 g m 32 to Legal US 43 Ibs bond to 43 Ibs bond Ibs bond 43 Ibs bond Hapi a 50 sheets 1 sheet 50 sheets 10 sheets Executive A5 Bond paper Refertothe Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120 g m 28to 105 to 120g m2 28 105 to 120 g m 28to32 105 to 120 g m 28 to Plain paper 32 Ibs bond to 32 Ibs bond Ibs bond 32 Ibs bond EE 50 sheets 1 sheet 50 sheets 10 sheets Archive Refer tothe Refer to the Plain paper section 250 sheets 1 sheet e 250 sheets 50 sheets Punched Plain paper paper section Letterhead 5 Appendix 149 Specifications Type Glossy Photo Size Letter A4 Postcard 4x6 Dimensions Refer to the Plain paper section Weight Capacity CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series Tray1 111 to 130 g m 30 to 35 Ibs bond e 30sheets Manual feeder 111 to 130 g m 30 to 35 Ibs bond 1sheet CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Tray1 Optional tray 111 to 130 g m 30 to 35 Ibs bond for tray1 Tray1 30 sheets Optional tray 50 sheets Multi purpose tray 111 to 130 g m 30 to 35 Ibs bond e 5sheets Refer to the Plain paper section 131 to 175 g m 35 to 131 to 175 g m 35 131 to 175 g m 35 to 47 131 to 175 g m 35 to 47 Ibs bond to 47 Ibs bond Ibs bond 47 lbs bond e 30sheets 1sheet Tray1 30 s
190. information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on windows 1 Software Installation This chapter provides instructions for installing essential and helpful software for use in an environment where the machine is connected via a cable A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine s driver see Installing driver over the network on page 181 Installation for Mac 172 Reinstallation for Mac 173 Installation for Linux 174 Reinstallation for Linux 175 r Ifyou are a Windows OS user refer to the Basic Guide for installing the machine s driver see Installing the driver locally on page 30 e Only use a USB cable no longer then 3 meter 118 inches Installation for Mac O N O UH AWN No 11 12 13 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop Double click the MAC Installer folder 5 Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue Click Agree to agree to the license agreement When the message that warns that all applications will close on your computer appears click Continue Click Continue on the User Options Pane Click Ins
191. ing does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Image Capture operates properly in Mac OS X 10 4 7 or higher Scanning from network connected machine 1 tad Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Start Applications and click Image Capture If No Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem continues refer to the Image Capture s help 2 Network or wireless model only see Features by models on page 5 4 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Start Applications and click Image Capture According to OS follow steps below For 10 4 Click Devices gt Browse Devices on Menu bar Select your machine in Twain devices option Make sure that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked 4 Special Features Scan features Click Connect If a warning message appears click Change Port to select port Linux scanning or If TWAIN Ul appears click Change Port from the Preference tab and select a new port Scanning For 10 5 Click Devices gt Browse Devices on Menu b
192. ing ga Operating system problems Condition The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Suggested solutions Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options KA It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Some letters are not displayed normally during cover page printing Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the cover page When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader KU Refer to the Mac User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages 6 Troubleshooting go Operating system problems Common Linux problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print Check if the printer driver is installed in your system Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in the Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list If not open Add new printer wizard to set up your device e Check if the machine is started Open Printers configuration and select your machine from th
193. int on both sides of a sheet of paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented Printing Double sided Printing M n KA e You can use this feature with Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized paper rinting Manua e If your machine does not have a duplex unit you should complete the printing job manually The machine prints every other page of the document first After that a message appears on your computer e Skip Blank Pages feature does not work when you select the Double sided Printing Manual option 4 Special Features 269 Printing features Item Description e Double sided Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the settings you have selected on the control panel of the machine Printing This option is available only when you use the PCL XPS printer driver Double sided e None Disables this feature Printing Manual Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding e Reverse Double Sided Printing Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing This option is not available when you use Double sided Printing Manual Paper Options Changes the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by entering in a percentage by which to enlarge or decrease the document Imo Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text
194. ion check SMB or FTP and set the information 6 Click Apply LA If you make a group 1 Click Address Book gt Group gt Add Group 2 Select the Speed No and enter Group Name You can easily add individual address if you check Yes for Add individual s after this group is created 3 Click Apply 4 Special Features 258 Storing email address Searching for an email address Searching sequentially through memory 1 Select D scan T Address Book gt Search amp Send gt Select an address group gt F on the control panel Or select Scan to gt Address Book gt Search amp Send gt Select an address group gt All on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Email gt View List gt Individual or Group on the touch screen 2 Search through the entire memory in index numerical order and select the name and address you want Searching with a particular first letter 1 Select D scan T Address Book gt Search amp Send gt Select an address group gt O on a control panel Or select Scan to 5 Address Book gt Search amp Send gt Select an address group gt ID on the control panel 2 Enter the first few letters of the name you want 3 Press the arrows until the name and number you want appears 4 Special Features 259 Entering various characters As you perform various tasks you may need to enter names and numbers For example when yo
195. ion fax number email address or server address and press OK 4 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine Forwarding a received fax You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other destination by a fax an email or a server If you are out of office but have to receive the fax this feature may be useful 9 Though you sent or received a color fax the data is forwarded in grayscale 4 Special Features 295 i Fax features 1 Press PG fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Receive Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to PC Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Receive Forward gt Forward to Fax Forward to PC Forward to Email or Forward to Server on the touch screen e Forward options may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Variety feature on page 8 To set the machine to print out a fax when fax forwarding has been completed select Forward amp Print Enter the destination fax number email address or server address and press OK Enter the starting tim and ending time then press OK Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode Subsequent sent faxes will be forwarded to the specified fax machine Sending faxes on both sides of paper 2 This is
196. is equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e Ifyou intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine 5 Appendix ga Regulatory information If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise t
197. is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA compliant scanner WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP Glossary Glossary WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wireless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security WPS The Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for establishing a wireless home network If your wireless access point supports WPS you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portable document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format Glossary ga
198. ith the other machine operator and ask them to solve the problem on their side Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display indicating the memory status shows delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Call for service Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting Check the paper size and type again 6 Troubleshooting Operating system problems Condition File in Use message appears during installation Suggested solutions Exit all software applications Remove all software from the startup group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool 32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred message appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred 2 Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages 6 Troubleshoot
199. job 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Using USB memory device 1 Select BI scan gt Menu gt Scan Feature gt USB Feature on the 3 Select the desired status you want and press OK control panel 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set other setting options Or select Scan to gt menu gt Scan Feature gt USB Feature on the control panel 5 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode Or select Direct USB gt Scan to USB gt settings on the touch screen Ed 95 You can change the default scan settings Refer to the Advanced Guide 2 Select the setting option you want appears Original Size Sets the image size Printing from a USB memory device Original Type Sets the original document s Resolution Sets the image resolution You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device Color Mode Sets the color mode If you select Mono in this option File s supported by Direct Print option you cannot select JPEG in File Format PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are File Format Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved compatible When you select TIFF or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages If you select JPEG in this option you cannot select Mono in Color Mode If you print PRN files created from other machine the printout would be different Duplex Sets the duplex mode Darkness Sets the brightness level to scan an original
200. l constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds e Do not use stamped envelopes e Donot use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials e Donot use damaged or poorly made envelopes 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 155 Media and tray Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature for 0 1 second about 170 C 338 F The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet Transparency e In case of color printing using transparencies the picture quality would be lower than mono printing when the printouts are used on the overhead projector To avoid damaging the machine use only transparencies designed for use in laser printers CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series e Must withstand the machine s fusing temperature e Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine e Donot leave unused transparencies in the p
201. l duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the Ipr printing system or other 5 Printing from applications applications for odd even printing There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Text Specifies the page margins and set the text options such as Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such spacing or columns application Graphics Sets image options that are used when printing image ga files such as color options image size or image position 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu p g ge p Advanced Sets the print resolution paper source and destination 2 Select Print directly using lpr Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window Ul In the LPR GUI window select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties 6 Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing 7 The Printing window appears allowing you to monitor the status of your print job To abort the current job click Cancel 4 Special Features Printing features Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS directly from the command line interface The CUPS Ipr utility allows you to do that but the driver s package replaces the standard Ipr tool by a much more user friendly LPR GUI program To print any docum
202. lable accessories Available maintenance parts Storing the toner cartridge Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the waste toner container Installing accessories Monitoring the supplies life Setting the toner low alert Cleaning the machine Tips for moving amp storing your machine Ordering supplies and accessories 2 Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies and maintenance parts To order Samsung authorized supplies accessories and maintenance parts contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine You can also visit www samsung com supplies and then select your country region to obtain the contact information for service 3 Maintenance Available consumables When supplies reach the end of their life spans you can order the followings of supplies for your machine Type Model Average yield Part name Toner CLX 419xN Series Average continuous black cartridge yield Apporx 2 500 standard pages Black e CLT K504S Black cartridge CLX 419xFN Series Average continuous color cartridge yield Apporx 1 800 standard pages Yellow Magenta CLT Y504S Yellow CLX 419xFW Series aN CLT M504S Magenta e CLT C504S Cyan CLX 626xND Series Average continuous black cartridge yield Apporx 2 000 standard pages Black e CLT K506S Black CLX 626xFD Series Avera
203. lass You may get hurt Do not put hands while closing the scanner lid The scanner lid may fall on your hands and get hurt Do not look the light from inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes In the document feeder Using the document feeder or dual automatic document feeder DADF you can load up to 50 sheets of paper 80 g m 21 Ibs bond for one job Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals Load the original face up into the document feeder input tray Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Media and tray Adjust the document feeder width guides to the paper size 3 Dust on the document feeder glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean see Cleaning the machine on page 108 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 63 Basic printing advanced print features on page 267 2 If you are a Mac Linux or UNIX operating systems user refer to the Advanced Guide see Mac printing on page 276 Linux printing on page 278 or Unix printing on page 280 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu K For special printing features refer to the Advanced Guide see Using 3 Sel
204. later use you can save as your scan settings and add it to the Job Type drop down list 4 Special Features 290 Scan features Editing an image with Image Manager The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and tools to edit your scanned image 4 Special Features 291 Fax features KA e For basic faxing features refer to the Basic Guide see Basic faxing on page 77 e This function is not supported for CLX 419xN CLX 626xND Series see Control panel overview on page 24 Automatic redialing When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number The redial time depends on the country s factory default setting When the display shows Retry Redial press Start button to redial the number without waiting To cancel the automatic redialing press Stop or Stop Clear button To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts 1 Press amp fax gt Menu gt Fax Setup gt Sending on the control panel 2 Select Redial Times or Redial Term you want 3 Select the option you want Redialing the fax number 1 Press 0 Redial Pause button on the control panel 2 Select the fax number you want Ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown 3 When an original is loaded in the document feeder the machine automatically begins to send If an or
205. layed It may look slightly different depending on your application 3 Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window 4 Click Print or OK 4 Special Features 293 l Fax features Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be present You cannot send a color fax using this feature Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder Press Pi fax on the control panel Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs Press Menu gt Fax Feature gt Delay Send on the control panel Or select Fax gt Delayed Send on the touch screen Enter the number of the receiving fax machine and press OK The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes highlights and repeat steps 5 You can add up to 10 destinations e Once you entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial numbers anymore 00 5 Enter the job name and the time If you set a time earlier than the current time the fax will be sent at that time on the following day The original is scanned into memory before transmission The machine returns to ready mode The display reminds you that you are in ready mode and that a delayed fax is set You can check the list of delayed fax jobs Press Menu gt System Setup
206. le on page 207 C From the machine s control panel See Machines with a display or touch screen on page 195 D See Machines without a display screen on page 196 See Using the menu button or touch screen on page 197 E Without Access Point From the computer Windows user see Ad hoc via USB cable on page 200 F Mac user see Ad hoc via USB cable on page 205 G Wi Fi Direct setup See Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing on page 210 H 2 If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation refer to the troubleshooting chapter see Troubleshooting for wireless network on page 212 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 193 Wireless network setup Using the WPS button If your machine and an access point or wireless router support Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the g WPS button on the control panel without a computer KA If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode make sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine Using the WPS PBC button or entering the PIN from the computer to connect to the access point or wireless router varies depending on the access point or wireless router you are using Refer to the user s guide of the access point or wireless router you are using When using the WPS button to set the wireless network security settings may change To prevent this lo
207. le to your machine Active Job All of the print jobs waiting to be printed are listed in the active job queue in the order you sent them to the printer You can delete a job from the queue before printing or promote a job to print sooner Secured Job You can print or delete a secured job Shows the list of secured jobs the user has set in the printer driver You need to enter the user name and password set in the printer driver Stored Job You can print or delete a stored job File Policy You can choose the file policy for generating file name before you proceed with the job through optional memory If the optional memory already has the same name when you entered a new file name you can rename or overwrite it 4 Special Features 304 5 Useful Management Tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine Easy Capture Manager 306 Samsung Easy Color Manager 307 Samsung AnyWeb Print 308 Easy Eco Driver 309 Using SyncThru Web Service 310 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 314 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 319 Using Samsung Printer Status 322 Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator 324 Easy Capture Manager K e Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 5 Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key Now you can
208. lear button or home fay icon to return to ready mode 4 Special Features 262 Setting up the fax address book 1 kad N Aa UW Kk Select 4S fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Group Dial on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View List gt Group on the touch screen Enter the group dial number you want to edit and press OK Enter a new speed dial number to add and press OK then Add appears Enter a speed dial number stored in the group and press OK Delete appears Press OK to add or delete the number Repeat step 3 to add or delete more numbers Select No at the Another No and press OK Press Stop Clear button or home fag icon to return to ready mode There are two ways to search for a number in memory You can either scan from A to Z sequentially or you can search by entering the first letters of the name associated with the number 4 Select ct pa fax gt Address Book gt Search amp Dial gt Speed Dial or Group Dial on the control panel Enter All or ID and press OK Press the name and number or the keypad button labeled with the letter you want to search For example if you want to find the name MOBILE press the 6 button which is labeled with MNO Press Stop Clear button to return to ready mode Printing address book You can check your Address Book settings by printing a list 4
209. lect an authentication type Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network e Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value e Confirm Network Password Confirm the encryption network password value e WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 205 Wireless network setup 12 The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security setting Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next e WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy is a security protocol preventing unauthorized access to your wireless network WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet exchanged on a wireless network using a 64 bit or 128 bit WEP encryption key The window showing the wireless network settings appears Check the settings and click Next KA Before entering the IP address for the machine you must know the computer s network configuration information If the computer s network configuration is set to DHCP the wireless network setting should also be DHCP Likewise if the computer s network configuration is set to Static the wireless network setting should also be Static If your comp
210. les of common restrictions are listed below A Radio frequency wireless communication can interfere with equipment on commercial aircraft Current aviation regulations require wireless devices to be turned off while traveling in an airplane IEEE 802 11 also known as wireless Ethernet and Bluetooth communication devices are examples of devices that provide wireless communication gt PBB gt In environments where the risk of interference to other devices or services is harmful or perceived as harmful the option to use a wireless device may be restricted or eliminated Airports Hospitals and Oxygen or flammable gas laden atmospheres are limited examples where use of wireless devices may be restricted or eliminated When in environments where you are uncertain of the sanction to use wireless devices ask the applicable authority for authorization prior to use or turning on the wireless device Every country has different restrictions on the use of wireless devices Since your system is equipped with a wireless device when traveling between countries with your system check with the local Radio Approval authorities prior to any move or trip for any restrictions on the use of a wireless device in the destination country If your system came equipped with an internal embedded wireless device do not operate the wireless device unless all covers and shields are in place and the system is fully assembled Wireless devices are not us
211. ly as below Document is synonymous with original Paper is synonymous with media or print media Machine refers to printer or MFP General icons Icon Text Description Gives users information to protect the machine A Caution from possible mechanical damage or malfunction Provides additional information or detailed a Note specification of the machine function and feature 1 Introduction la Safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others and to prevent any potential damage to your machine Be sure to read Operating environment and understand all of these instructions before using the machine After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference A Warning Important safety symbols cna gt NO O Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is CNN not grounded Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter This could result in electric shock or fire O Do not place anything on top of the machine water small metal or g ng heavy objects candles lit cigarettes etc Warnin Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe A g personal injury or death This could result in electric shock or fire a O e Ifthe machine gets overheated it releases smoke makes Cau on Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor 464 strange noises or generates an odd odor imm
212. m the mass storage device queue decreasing the computer s work load Print Schedule Select this setting to print the document at a specified time e Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel e UserID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows Enter Password If the Property of the document box you selected is Secured you have to enter the password for the document box This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel e Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it 4 Special Features Printing features Item Description Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission e User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job K e Click the question mark mga from the upper right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about e Administrators can enable job accounting and configure permissions in the control panel or SyncThru Web Service Encrypts printing data first and transmits it to the machine This feature protects the printing information even though the data is snatched on a network Job Encryption Job Encry
213. m the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen see Using help on page 67 A print job is extremely slow The job may be very complex Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings Half the page is blank The page orientation setting may be incorrect Change the page orientation in your application see Opening printing preferences on page 66 See the printer driver help screen see Using help on page 67 The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use see Opening printing preferences on page 66 The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete The machine cable is loose or defective Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job Finally try a new machine ca
214. mation comment or user ID to 7 Stamp the copy output e Opacity You can select the transparency e Position Sets the position 3 Useful Setting Menus 226 Copy Item 2 up or 4 up N up Copy Description Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet of paper II N iM IN f p Item Book Copy Description The Book Copy feature allows you to copy an entire book If the book is too thick lift the cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the cover open Off Does not use this feature Left Page Use this option to print left page of the book Right Page Use this option to print right page of the book Both Page Use this option to print both pages of the book This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass 3 Useful Setting Menus Copy Item Adjust Bkgd Adjust Background Description Item Prints an image without its background This copy feature removes the background color and can be helpful when copying an original containing color in the background such as a newspaper or a catalog e Off Does not use this feature e Auto Optimizes the background Enhance Lev 1 2 The higher the n
215. mitter Operation of this device is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired Russia only operation of the device AB57 Wireless devices are not user serviceable Do not modify them in any way Modification to a wireless device will void the authorization to use it T ntact manufacturer for service ka AB57 MUHcBA3NPoccHu CCC MuHcBa3n Poccun 5 Appendix 161 Regulatory information Germany only Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Turkey only e RoHS EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This EEE is compliant with RoHS e Bu r n n ortalama ya am s resi 7 y l garanti suresi 2 yildir Thai only This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Canada only This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five L indice d equivalence de la sonnerie IE
216. mover overlay e Click Save The name appears on the Overlay List f Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The file is not printed Instead it is stored on your computer hard disk drive a Click the Advanced tab b Select the desired overlay from the Text drop down list c If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop down list select Edit from the list and click Load Select the overlay file you want to use Overlay If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Open window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay Using a page overlay List box d If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm printing an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window m In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab Select Edit in the Text drop down list Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box Click Delete When a confirming message window appears click Yes Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window You can delete page o
217. n Make sure that your machine is connected to a network Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Select A scan gt Scan To SMB or Scan To FTP on the control panel Or select Scan gt SMB or FTP on the touch screen Select a server and scan format you want The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified server AUA W page 60 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop Click File gt Import and select the scanner device Set the scan options Scan and save your scanned image 4 Special Features 286 Scan features 7 Scan and save your scanned image Scanning using the WIA driver Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for Scanning with Samsung Scan Assistant scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan and easily adjust images without using F This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods additional software see Features by models on page 5 e For Windows you need to download Scan Assistant from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find KU The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port your product 5 Sup
218. nThru admin software 5 Useful Management Tools 321 Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status Icon Mean Description lt Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no r TheSamsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user s ihe 4 guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use Warning The machine is in a state where an error might occur in e Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine the future For example it might be in toner low status see Specifications on page 143 which may lead to toner empty status e Available for Windows OS users only see Software on page 5 a Error Themachine hasat least one ertor Samsung I rintcr status Samsung Printer Status overview sero If an error occurs while operating you can check the error from the Samsung Printer Status Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software a 3 You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually Go to the Printing Sr Preferences click the Basic tab gt Printer Status button These icons appear on the Windows task bar Toner Level You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge The machine and the number of 1 toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the m
219. nal limitations cautions and concerns for specific countries are listed in the specific country sections or country group sections The wireless devices in your system are only qualified for use in the countries identified by the Radio Approval Marks on the system rating label If the country you will be using the wireless device in is not listed contact your local Radio Approval agency for requirements Wireless devices are closely regulated and use may not be allowed 5 Appendix 166 Regulatory information The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in your printer is well below the RF exposure limits as known at this time Because the wireless devices which may be embedded into your printer emit less energy than is allowed in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations manufacturer believes these devices are safe for use Regardless of the power levels care should be taken to minimize human contact during normal operation As a general guideline a separation of 20 cm 8 inches between the wireless device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities is typical This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on and transmitting This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter Some circumstances require restrictions on wireless devices Examp
220. name is possible numeric IP address is not allowed The installed printers are listed in the drop down list b Select the printer to be deleted 7 Queue type shows the connection as Ipd or jetdirect in the c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system corresponding list box Additionally usb type is available on Sun Solaris d Execute the install d command to uninstall the whole package OS e To verify removal results execute the install c command 8 Select Copies to set the number of copies To re install it use the command install i to reinstall the binaries 9 Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted 10 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order Setting up the printer 11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default To add the printer to your UNIX system run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this 12 Click OK to add the printer window according to the following steps 1 Type the name of the printer 2 Select the appropriate printer model from the model list Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the Type field This is optional 2 Using a Network Connected Machine IPv6 configuration A IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher From the control panel Activating IPv6 9 e Some features and option
221. nations e Once you have entered a group dial number you cannot enter another group dial number When you have finished entering fax numbers select No at the Another No prompt and press OK The machine begins sending the fax to the numbers you entered in the order in which you entered them Multi send report is printed after sending faxes Your machine is preset Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax Adjusting the document settings Before starting a fax change the following settings according to your original s status to get the best quality E e It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 or Control panel overview on page 24 Resolution The default document settings produce good results when using typical text based originals However if you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup I Basic faxing e Color Fax Original with colors The resolution setting is applied to the current fax job To change the default setting see Advanced Guide e Memory transmission is not available in this mode Ls You can only send a color fax if the machine
222. nches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 83 x 8 27 inches 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 83 inches 70 to 89 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond A6 e 150 sheets of 80 g m 21 Ibs bond Weight Capacity CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series Manual feeder 70 to 89 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond sheet Tray1 Optional tray 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond e Tray1 250 sheets of 80 g m 21 Ibs bond e Optional tray 520 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ibs bond 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond 150 sheets of 80 g m 21 Ibs bond Not available in optional tray Multi purpose tray 70 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ibs bond 50 sheets 5 Appendix 146 i Specifications Weight Capacity CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series Type Size Dimensions i CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Tray1 Manual feeder Tray1 Optional tray Multi purpose tray Envelope Envelope 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches 75 to 90 g m 20 to 75 to90 g m 20to 75 to 90 g m 20 to 75 to 90 g m 20 to Monarch 24 Ibs bond 24 Ibs bond 24 Ibs bond 24 Ibs bond Envelope 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches PANTY napasa E ee No 10 sheets shee Envelope 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Not available in optional
223. nd set the paper type to Recycled see Opening printing preferences on page 66 e Ensure the correct paper type is selected For example If Thicker Paper is selected but Plain Paper actually used an overcharging can occur causing this copy quality problem 6 Troubleshooting 338 Printing quality problems Condition Misformed characters AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCcac AaBbCcac Suggested solutions If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray 6 Troubleshooting 339 Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Wrinkles or creases e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray AaBbCc AaBbCc Check for leaking toner Clean the inside of the machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 Back of printouts are dirty The toner cartridge may not be installed properl
224. nd system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Ethernet Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allowa third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is acommonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Glossary 360 Glossary Gateway IEEE A connection between computer networks or b
225. nel Job manage Item Description CLR Empty Msg When toner cartridge is empty this option appears You KU Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or can clear the empty message models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on h h ly life indi itori page 33 Supplies Life S ows t 3 pp y life indicators see Monitoring the supplies life on page 106 Image Mar Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color To change the menu options registration color density etc e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Job Manage on the control panel Customizes the level to alert toner low or toner empty TonerLow Alert Kia n see Setting the toner low alert on page 107 f Item Description Shows the machine s serial number When you call for Serial Number service or register as a user on the Samsung website you Active Job Shows the print job lists that are waiting to be printed can find this be ae Stored Job Shows the print job lists that are stored on the disk 3 Useful Setting Menus ga System setup Item Description Secured Job Shows the print job lists that are secured on the disk Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or pp Address book setup Models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 Some menus ma
226. ner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Mac operating systems UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located USB Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it
227. ng USB memor You can delete image files stored on a USB memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device Select the file you want to delete and press OK Select Yes U A W N Press Stop Clear button or home fay icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 85 Using USB memory device Formatting a USB memory device 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine and then press Direct USB 2 For touch screen model select Direct USB gt File Manage gt Next gt select a 2 DEIECT Check Spaga file gt Fe settings gt Format on the touch screen 3 The available memory space appears on the display 4 Press Stop Clear button or home ffay icon to return to ready 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine mode and then press Direct USB 2 Select File Manage gt Format and press OK 3 Select Yes 4 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode Viewing the USB memory status You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents e For touch screen model select Direct USB gt Show Space gt Next on the touch screen 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 86 3 Maintenance This chapter provides information about purchasing supplies accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine Ordering supplies and accessories Available consumables Avai
228. ng com ua_ru SWEDEN 0771 726 7864 SAMSUNG www samsung com UZBEKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com 0848 SAMSUNG 7267864 CHF www samsung com ch SWITZERLAND 0 08 min TEE VENEZUELA 0 800 100 5303 www samsung com ch_fr French VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www samsung com TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com 0800 329 999 www samsung com TAIWAN 0266 026 066 TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www samsung com 1800 29 3232 www samsung com THAILAND 02 689 3232 TRINIDAD amp 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com TOBAGO TURKEY 444 77 11 www samsung com U A E 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com UGANDA 0800 300 300 www samsung com U K 0330 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 356 Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 11b g n 802 11b g n can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps 802 11b g n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access P
229. ng faxes with entering the password E To use the secure receiving mode activate the menu from ae fax gt Menu gt Fax Feature gt Secure Receive gt On on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive on the touch screen Printing received faxes Select ae fax gt A Menu gt Fax Feature gt Secure Receive gt Print on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Fax Setup gt Secure Receive gt Print on the touch screen Enter a four digit password and press OK 3 The machine prints all of the faxes stored in memory Printing faxes on both sides of the paper Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Press PG fax 5 Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving gt Duplex Print on the control panel Off Prints in Normal mode Long Edge Prints pages to be read like a book ILUTO ka 4 Special Features 300 l Fax features Short Edge Prints pages to be read by flipping like a note pad 3 Press OK 4 Press Stop Clear button to return to ready mode Receiving
230. nistrator L A W N The following instructions may vary from your model or operating systems Open opt Samsung mfp share utils Double click the SetIPApplet html file Click to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 180 Installing driver over the network K e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 5 e The machine that does not support the network interface it will not be able to use this feature see Rear view on page 23 e You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive For windows select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set see Setting IP address on page 178 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD
231. nter Manager 5 34Switch to advanced mode gt Device Settings 2 SEI eee optlon YOU Want then pies OK see Device Settings on page 321 e Language change the language that is displayed on the control panel e Date amp Time When you set the time and date they are used in delay fax and delay print They are printed on reports If however they are not correct you need to change it for the correct time being After installation is complete you may want to set the machine s default settings To change the machine s default settings follow these steps 2 Enter the correct time and date using arrows or numeric keypad see It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some Keypad letters and numbers on page 260 models e Month 01 to 12 e Day 01 to 31 e Year requires four digits Hour 01 to 12 e Minute 00 to 59 e Clock Mode You can set your machine to display the current time using either a 12 hour or 24 hour format e PowerSave When you are not using the machine for a while use this feature to save power 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 46 Machine s basic settings 2 When you press the Power Wakeup button start printing or a fax is received the product will wake up from the power saving mode Altitude Adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which atmospheric pressure is determined by the height of the machine above sea level Before you set
232. o Email I pag 3 Useful Setting Menus 236 Scan Item File Format Description Sets the file format in which the image is to be saved If you select JPEG TIFF XPS or PDF you can select to scan multiple pages Depending on the selected scan type this option may not appear Single TIFF Scans the originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file Multi TIFF Scans originals in TIFF Tagged Image File Format but several originals are scanned as one file Single PDF Scans the originals in PDF and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file Multi PDF Scans originals in PDF but several originals are scanned as one file Single XPS Scans the originals in XPS and several originals are scanned as an each individual TIFF file Multi XPS Scans originals in XPS but several originals are scanned as one file JPEG Scans original in JPEG format XPS This feature is only supported for the devices that has mass storage e The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option if Mono has been selected for Color Mode Item Description Sets scan destination to a shared folder You can create Shared Folder and use the shared folder see Using shared folder features on page 302 WA Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your m
233. o feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes 6 Troubleshooting gg Power and cable connecting problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power e Connect the machine to the electricity supply first If the machine has a Power Wakeup button on the control or the connection cable between the press it computer and the machine is not Disconnect the machine s cable and reconnect it connected properly 6 Troubleshooting 330 Printing problems Condition The machine does not print The machine is not receiving power Possible cause Suggested solutions Connect the machine to the electricity supply first If the machine has a Power Wakeup button on the control press it The machine is not selected as the default Select your machine as your default machine in Windows machine Check the machine for the following The cover is not closed Close the cover Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on page 122 No paper is loaded Load paper see Loading paper in the tray on page 49 The toner cartridge is not installed Install the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Make sure the protect cover and sheets are removed from the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 If a system error occurs contact your service representative The conne
234. oes not print It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8 51 or earlier of Ghostscript 64 bit Linux OS and has been whole pages and output is reported to bugs ghostscript com as Ghostscript Bug 688252 The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v 8 52 or above Download printed on half the page the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http sourceforge net projects ghostscript and install it to solve this problem 6 Troubleshooting 350 Operating system problems Condition Suggested solutions I cannot scan via Gimp Front Check if Gimp Front end has Xsane Device dialog on the Acquire menu If not you should install Xsane plug in for Gimp on the your end computer You can find Xsane plug in package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or Gimp home page For the detailed information refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or Gimp Front end application If you wish to use another kind of scan application refer to application s Help Cannot open port device file Avoid changing print job parameters e q via LPR GUI while a print job is in progress Known versions of CUPS server break the print error message appears when job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port printing a document while printing the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs If
235. oftware and install the latest version during the printer driver installation process This is available only for Windows If you have Internet access you can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Wide range of functionality and application support Supports various paper sizes see Print media specifications on page 146 Print watermark You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential see Using advanced print features on page 267 You can print in various operating systems see System requirements on page 152 Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and or a network interface Supports various wireless network setting method N a Using the WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup button You can easily connect to a wireless network using the WPS button on the machine and the access point a wireless router Using the USB cable or a network cable You can connect and set various wireless network settings using a USB cable or a network cable e Using the Wi Fi Direct You can conveniently print from your mobile device using the Wi Fi or Wi Fi Direct feature KA See Introducing wireless set up methods on page 193 Features by models Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country Operating System
236. oint AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Mac 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform Glossary Glossary BOOTP Coverage Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client
237. olled paper Torn paper Using the scanner glass you can copy or scan originals You can get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images Make sure that no originals are in the document feeder If an original is detected in the document feeder the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass Remove all staples and paper clips before loading Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents with other unusual characteristics 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 60 Media and tray 1 Lift and open the scanner lid 2 Place the original face down on the scanner glass Align it with the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup CI Media and tray 3 Close the scanner lid a Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean see Cleaning the machine on page 108 If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm start copying with the scanner lid open Be careful not to break the scanner g
238. on any option you want to know about see Using help Description Selects the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet 4 Special Features 268 Printing features Item Description Prints a single page document onto 4 Poster 2x2 9 Poster 3x3 or 16 Poster 4x4 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets Poster Printing together to form one poster size document Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab Le to make it easier to paste the sheets together cab Nsa B Nm ine W E 10 mm Prints your document on both sides of a sheet of paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet S Booklet Printing aw e If you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 US Folio or Oficio sized print media e The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes Select the available paper Size option under the Paper tab to see what paper sizes are available e Ifyou select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without 4 or mark e Double sided Pr
239. on both sides of the paper Click the question mark on the bottom left corner of the window and click on the topic you want to know about A pop up window appears with information Some features may not be available depending on models or options It about that option s feature which is provided from the driver means that the features are not supported see Variety feature on page 8 Printer 10 88 181 197 aA Presets Standard H Before printing in the duplex mode decide on which edge you will be binding jae Jana Ong your finished document The binding options are as follows ee Orientation IB Te Long Edge Binding This option is the conventional layout used in book a binding on ee fo a E2 S H N Short Edge Binding This option is the type often used with calendars ikan Border Fone Two Sided Off a Reverse Page Orientation 1 From your Mac application select Print from the File menu OED Ci Aiow C EB 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation 4 Special Features Printing features Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed 4 General Changes the paper size the paper type and the orientation of the documents It enables the duplex feature adds Some features may not be available depending on models or options It start and end banners and changes the number of pages per sheet means that the features are not supported Automatic manua
240. onnect the machine with a standard network cable 8 Click Next 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter If the wireless security setting window appears enter the registered your machine s new IP address in the browser window password network password and click Next For example 9 The confirmation window appears please check your wireless setup If the setup is right click Apply http 192 168 1 133 3 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 209 Wireless network setup 4 Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings 6 Click Wireless gt Custom You can also turn the Wi Fi network on off Setting the Wi Fi Direct for mobile printing Wi Fi Direct is an easy to setup peer to peer connection method between the Wi Fi Direct certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure connection and better throughput than ad hoc mode With Wi Fi Direct you can connect your printer to a Wi Fi Direct network while concurrently connecting to an access point You can also use a wired network anda Wi Fi Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print documents both from Wi Fi Direct and from a wired network 2 e Yo
241. opying or printing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The machine printer cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off 6 Troubleshooting 345 Faxing problems Condition The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working Suggested solutions Unplug the power cord and plug it in again e Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet e Ensure that the power is turned on No dial tone e Check that the phone line is properly connected see Rear view on page 23 e Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone The numbers stored in memory do not dial correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly To check that print an address book list The original does not feed into the machine Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin e Make sure that the document feeder is firmly closed e The document feeder rubber pad may need to be replace
242. orce it in Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet or this could result in electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords This could result in electric shock or fire and or injury to your pet Operating method A Caution ape YA m saf aD Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing It can cause damage to the machine Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray You may get injured Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts When printing large quantities the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot Do not allow children to touch Burns can occur When removing jammed paper do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects It can damage the machine Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray It can damage the machine 1 Introduction 16 Safety information O Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening A Caution This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire i O Before moving the machine turn the power off and disconnect all Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other A A ba eae cords The information below are only suggestions based on the than those specified herein may result in hazard
243. ordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian radio interference regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appareils num riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada United States of America Federal Communications Commis
244. ore lying flat not standing on end with the same side facing up as if it were installed in the machine Harana R Samsung s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused e Donot store consumables in any of the following conditions by the use ofa refilled remanufactured or non Samsung brand toner Temperature greater than 40 C 104 F cartridges Humidity range less than 20 or greater than 80 An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature Direct sunlight or room light Dusty places Acar for along period of time Anenvironment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air 3 Maintenance EI Storing the toner cartridge Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life the life of the toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require The actual print yield may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on operating environment percentage of image area printing interval media type and or media size For example if you print a lot of graphics the consumption of the toner is higher and you may need to change the cartridge more often 3 Maintenance ET i Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life e White streaks or light printing occurs and or density variation side to side e The Status LED blinks red The toner related message saying that the toner is low may appear on the displ
245. otocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and laser printers PDF Portable Document Format PDF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format Glossary 364 Glossary PostScript Protocol PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute PRN file An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the worl
246. ould either wait for completion of the current job or press the Release port button if you are sure that the present port application is not functioning properly The machine does not scan Ensure a document is loaded into the machine ensure your machine is connected to the computer If there is an I O error while scanning 6 Troubleshooting 351 Operating system problems 2 Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages Common PostScript problems The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used Problem The PostScript file cannot be printed Possible cause The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly Solution e Install the PostScript driver see Software Installation on page 171 Print a configuration page and verify that the PS version is available for printing Ifthe problem persists contact a service representative Limit Check Error report prints The print job was too complex You might need to reduce the complexity of the page or install more memory A PostScript error page prints The print job may not be PostScript Make sure that the print job is a PostScript job Check to see whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The optional tray is not selected in the driver The prin
247. ous radiation A units weight exposure If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting do This machine s power reception device is the power cord not lift the machine Ask for help and always use the appropriate To switch off the power supply remove the power cord from the amount of people to lift the device safety electrical outlet Then lift the machine e Ifthe machine weighs under 20 kg 44 09 Ibs lift with 1 person e Ifthe machine weighs 20 kg 44 09 Ibs 40kg 88 18 Ibs lift Installation Moving with 2 people e If the machine weighs more than 40 kg 88 18 Ibs lift with 4 or more people A Warning The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Do not place the machine on an unstable surface oa pa The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Do not place the machine in an area with dust humidity or water leaks Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord if necessary This could result in electric shock or fire Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet O 0 O Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire 1 Introduction Safety information Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters 6 feet with a 110V machine then the gauge should be 16 AWG or large
248. ousehold users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal The United States of America only Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 ax H a Dig KELAN SR BE HEN IEE A RE IER ari KING H abt AA SS Be SE AA a th Radio frequency emissions FCC information to the user This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference and This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation 5 Appendix 159 Regulatory information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in acc
249. ow shows the special media usable in tray Bond e The media is also shown in the Printing Preferences To get the highest printing quality select the proper media type from the Printing preferences Color d window gt Paper tab gt Paper Type see Opening printing preferences on page CardStock r 66 Labels For example if you want to print on labels select Labels for Paper Type Transparency Envelope Preprinted o 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 54 Media and tray Types Tray 1 Oplienaltay Manual feeder Multi purpose tray Cotton e Recycled Archive e O Letterhead Punched Glossy Photo e a CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only Supported Blank Not supported Envelope Printing successfully on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes To print an envelope place it as shown in the following figure CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series e When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight should not exceed 90 g m otherwise jams may occur Construction should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl and should not contain air Condition should not be wrinkled nicked nor damaged Temperature should resist the heat and pressure of the machine during operation e Use only wel
250. ows Completed While you are talking over the telephone connected to the EXT socket copy DRPD Setup If the DRPD setup fails Error DRPD Ring appears and scan features are not available Press OK when DRPD appears and start over from step 2 as x 2 e DRPD must be set up again if you re assign your fax number or connect Receiving faxes using DRPD mode the machine to another telephone line e After DRPD has been set up call your fax number again to verify that the This setting may not be available depending on your country Distinctive Ring is machine answers with a fax tone Then have a call placed to a different a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone number assigned to that same line to be sure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the EXT socket ae line to answer several different telephone numbers This feature is often used by answering services who answer telephones for many different clients and need to know which number someone is calling in on to properly answer the phone 4 Special Features 299 Fax features Receiving in secure receiving mode This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people Turn on secure receiving mode then all incoming faxes go into memory You can print the incomi
251. p on the touch screen Item Description Selects the direction in which information is printed ona page Portrait Orientation e Landscape Item Resolution Description Specifies the number of dots printed per inch dpi The higher the setting the sharper printed characters and graphics Clear Text Prints text darker than on a normal document Emulation Sets the emulation type and option Emulation Type The machine language defines how the computer communicates with the machine Setup Sets the detailed settings for the selected emulation type Edge Enhance It allows user to enhance sharpness of text and graphics for improving readability Trapping It reduces the white gap caused by misalignment of color channels in color printing mode Also black text will be overprinted on other colors You can enter the number of copies using the number SORE keypad Screen This option affect the resolution and clarity of your color output e Normal This mode will generate printouts with smooth tone over the entire page e Enhanced This mode will generate printouts with sharp texts and smooth graphic photo objects in the page e Detailed This mode will generate printouts with sharp details over the entire page Select Tray Sets the select tray type 3 Useful Setting Menus 224 Item Description Copy feature Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image s
252. parallel connector a This is an optional feature CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only b The optional IEEE 1284B parallel connector can be used by plugging in both the USB port and the 5V output port c CLX 419XFN CLX 419xFW CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only Telephone line socket LINE 1 Introduction 23 Control panel overview e This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model There are various types of control panels e Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Features by models on page 5 e Some buttons may not work depending on the mode copy fax or scan Type A CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR Series 1 Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy for easier reading when the original contains faint markings and dark images ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides of an ID card like a driver s license on a single side of paper see ID card copying on page 73 Scan to Sends scanned data 1 Introduction 24 Control panel overview 3 Display screen Shows the current status and prompts during an operation 4 Switches to Copy mode Copy G i
253. port transfer various settings machine setting network information address book etc between devices that have 2 If you have not configured outgoing server environment go to Settings gt the Cloning feature in SyncThru Web Service Network Settings gt Outgoing Mail Server SMTP to configure network environment before setting e mail notification E mail notification setup Select Enable check box to use the E mail Notification You can receive emails about your machine s status by setting this option By 5 Click Add button to add e mail notification user setting information such as IP address host name e mail address and SMTP Set the recipient name and e mail address es with notification items server information the machine status toner cartridge shortage or machine you want to receive an alert for error will be sent to a certain person s e mail automatically This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator 6 Click Apply K Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or 9 If the firewall is activated the e mail may not be sent successfully In that models If so it is not applicable to your machine case contact the a network administrator 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer from Windows LI LI LI TA LI LI Enter the machine IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address field Setting the system administrator s information and press the Enter key or click Go
254. port or Downloads For Mac open the Applications folder 5 Samsung folder 5 Samsung Scan Assistant 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and For Windows you can use the OCR Optical Character Reader feature powered on from Samsung Scan Assistant program 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on 1 Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and page 60 install it 3 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and 2 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and Printers powered on 4 Right click on device driver icon in Printers and Faxes gt Start Scan 3 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on New Scan application appears page 60 Ul 6 Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see your 4 Click Start gt All programs gt Samsung Printers and start Samsung preferences affect the picture Scan Assistant 4 Special Features Scan features L Select the Help menu or click the 7 button from the window and click on any option you want to know about Set the scan options Click Scan Scanning from USB connected machine Ul Select the option you want Scan and save your scanned image If scann
255. pose or manual feeder tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi purpose or manual feeder tray This also applies to other types of print media Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems see Print media specifications on page 146 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose or manual feeder tray 1 Pull out the paper tray for manual feeding OR Press the push release of multi purpose tray and it down to open CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series Menu Overview and Basic Setup 152 Media and tray 2 Load the paper Squeeze the multi purpose or manual feeder tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force them too much or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew 1 2 CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series KU e When printing the special media you must follow the loading guideline See Printing on special media on page 54 e When papers overlap when printing using Multi purpose tray open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing
256. ption feature is enabled only when the mass storage device is installed The mass storage device is used to decrypt the printing data see Variety feature on page 8 a This option is not available when you use XPS driver b CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only c CLX 626xFW Series only 4 Special Features Printing features Using Direct Printing Utility Available for Windows OS users only e Direct Printing Utility may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 5 What is Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends the PDF files directly to your machine to print without having to opening the file To install this program Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads A e Optional memory or mass storage device should be installed on your machine to print files using this program see Variety feature on page 8 You cannot print PDF files that are restricted Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program depends on how the PDF file was created e The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version
257. puters s Samsung Printing Status Program window appears on the computer telling you which color cartridge is empty on toner see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 322 Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine see Available consumables on page 89 2 e Shake the toner cartridge thoroughly it will increase the initial print quality Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 A e To prevent damage to the toner cartridge do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary Do not touch the green area of the toner cartridge Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors to open the toner cartridge package They might scratch the drum of the cartridge If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 3 Maintenance Replacing the toner cartridge CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series 3 Maintenance Replacing the toner cartridge CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series 3 Maintenance Replacing the waste toner container When the life span of the waste toner container has expired waste toner container related message appears on the screen display of the control panel indicating
258. r Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine and could result in electric shock or fire O Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location such as a closet If the machine is not well ventilated this could result in fire O Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and could result in electric shock or fire The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using contact the electrical utility company a AWG American Wire Gauge Maintenance Checking A Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine Do not clean the machine with benzene paint thinner or alcohol do not spray water directly into the machine gt gt x Ep This could result in electric shock or fire When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside do not operate the machine py N You could get injured Keep cleaning supplies away from children Children could get hurt ko Do not disassemble repair or rebuild the machine by yourself gt It can damage the machine Call a certified technician when the machine needs repairing J ck To clean and operate the machine strictly follow the user s guide provided with the machine
259. r access point and machine WA When you set the wireless configuration manually click Advanced Setting Enter the wireless Network Name Enter the SSID of the access point Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive SSID is case sensitive e tion M Select Infrastructure Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop Dperetom Bode oeisctlmmrastuctire 1 2 3 4 e Authentication Select an authentication type 5 Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon Open System Authentication is not used and encryption may or may not be used depending on the need for data security 6 Click Continue Shared Key Authentication is used A device that has a proper WEP key can access the network 7 Read the license agreement and click Continue WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal Select this option to authenticate the print server based on the WPA Pre Shared Key This uses a shared secret 8 key generally called Pre Shared Key pass phrase that is manually 9 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement ae configured on the access point and each of its clients When the message that warns that all applications will close on your Encryption Select the encryption None WEP64 WEP128 TKIP AES computer appears click Continue TKIP AES e Network Password Enter the encryption network password value 1 0 Click Wireless Network Setting button on the User Options Pane Confirm Netwo
260. r width guide 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EJ Media and tray L Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp If you do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams O ES LD i Do not use a paper with a leading edge curl it may cause a paper jam or the paper can be wrinkled 5 Insert the tray back into the machine 6 When you print a document set the paper type and size for tray see Setting the paper size and type on page 58 2 The settings set from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel a To print from an application open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 66 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type For example if you want to use a label set the paper type to Label d Select Auto Select in paper source then press OK e Start printing in application 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup El Media and tray Multi purpose or Manual feeder tray The multi purpose or manual feeder tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes see Print media specifications on page 146 Tips on using the multi purpose or manual feeder tray Load only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the multi pur
261. radio devices Low power Radio LAN type devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz band may be present embedded in your printer system which is intended for home or office use This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the European Union or associated areas if a CE mark with a C Notified Body Registration Number and the Alert Symbol is on the system label The power output of the wireless device or devices that may be embedded in you printer is well below the RF exposure limits as set by the European Commission through the R amp TTE directive European states qualified under wireless approvals EU countries European states with restrictions on use EU In France this equipment may only be used indoors EEA EFTA countries No limitations at this time Israel only 51 30319 NIN NNVPNA TIWN IV DININ WW ON 079 PWIND IW DPA MIINA NN PINNI TON ANN 2990 NDW 95 14 NWHd NG Regulatory compliance statements Wireless guidance Low power Radio LAN devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system The following section is a general overview of considerations while operating a wireless device Additio
262. re operating systems IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN ISO The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web Glossary 362 Glossary LDAP MH The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identi
263. res such as proofing a job and specifying of printing a secure print job in the printer properties window You can controll the active job queue and file policy in Job Manage menu see Using optional device features on page 303 3 Maintenance 104 Installing accessories 3 Maintenance 105 Monitoring the supplies life If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the number of pages the machine has printed or scanned Replace the corresponding parts if necessary Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models if so it is not applicable to your machine It may be necessary to press OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models 1 Select Menu gt System Setup gt Maintenance gt Supplies Life on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Report gt Supplies Information on the touch screen 2 Select the option you want and press OK 3 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode 3 Maintenance 106 Setting the toner low alert If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low a message or LED informing the user to change the toner cartridge appears You can set the option for whether or not this message or LED appears e Accessing menus may differ from model to model see Accessing the menu on page 33 e It may be
264. rface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report See Setting IP address on page 178 Configuring the machine s wireless network Before starting you will need to know the network name SSID of your wireless network and the network key if it is encrypted This information was set when the access point or wireless router was installed If you do not know about your wireless environment please ask the person who set up your network To configure wireless parameters you can use SyncThru Web Service Using SyncThru Web Service Before starting wireless parameter configuration check the cable connection status e2 Check whether or not the network cable is connected to the machine If not connect the machine with a standard network cable Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website Type in the ID and Password then click Login We recommend you to change the default password for security reasons ID admin Password sec00000 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Network Settings Click Wireless gt Wizard Wizard will help you setup the wireless network configuration However if you want to set the wireless network directly select Custom 2 Using a Network Connecte
265. ries 4 Troubleshooting 126 ing paper jams Clear If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting Clearing paper jams Inside the machine A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 2 Illustrations on this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models Check your machine type see Front view on page 21 4 Troubleshooting 128 j Clearing paper jams In the exit area CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 4 Troubleshooting 129 ing paper jams Clear If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting Clearing paper jams CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 4 Troubleshooting 131 Clearing paper jams If you do not see the paper in this area stop and go to next step 4 Troubleshooting 132 j Clearing paper jams In the duplex unit area KA CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only 4 Troubleshooting 133 Understanding the status LED The color of the LED indicates the machine s current status 9 e Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country see Control panel overview on page 24 e To resolve th
266. rimers in class 1 Shows all of the machine classes Exit in the class Refresh Renews the classes list Shows the status of the class and the number of machines Add Class Allows you to add a new machine class e Remove Class Removes the selected machine class 5 Useful Management Tools gg Using the Linux Unified Driver Configurator Ports configuration 1 Switches to Ports configuration 2 Shows all of the available ports In this window you can view the list of available ports check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has 3 terminated the job for any reason Shows the port type device connected to the port and status IE e Refresh Renews the available ports list Por configurabon te lp e amen e Release port Releases the selected port D idevimip Mevinip2 Acevimtp3 _Retease port Bs ZB pas BENT devmps ldevimip6 idevmip7 Help eee L MevirtpS Aovimtp Movimip10 Mowmiptt 3 setectod port Port typo USB Device Port is unused 5 Useful Management Tools 6 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error Paper feeding problems 329 Power and cable connecting problems 330 Printing problems 331 Printing quality problems 335 Copying problems 343 Scanning problems 344 Faxing problems 346 Operating system problems 348 L For e
267. rk Password Confirm the encryption network password value WEP Key Index If you are using WEP Encryption select the appropriate WEP Key Index 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 203 Wireless network setup The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security enabled 2 Can start to build Wi Fi Direct by using Samsung Easy Printer Manager see Setting up Wi Fi Direct on page 210 Enter the Network Password of the access point or router e Wi Fi Direct Name The default Wi Fi Direct Name is the model name and the maximum length is 22 characters 12 If your printer supports Wi Fi Direct the following screen appears e Password setting is the numeric string and the size is 8 64 characters Click Next Wireless Settings Wi Fi Direct Settings 1 3 When the wireless network settings are completed disconnect the USB cable between the computer and machine Your printer supports Wi Fi Direct 14 Wireless network set up is completed After the installation is finished click Quit KA After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a Since your printer is a Wi Fi enabled printer you can use Wi Fi Direct to enable your mobile machine driver to print from an application see Installation for Mac on device to easily connect to your printer page 172 Do you want to turn on Wi Fi Direct on your printer Yes want to turn on Wi Fi Direct on my printer Help i
268. rogram disable the computer firewall from Control Machine Setup gt Next gt Reports gt Network Configuration Panel gt Security Center gt Windows Firewall Using this Network Configuration Report you can find your machine s MAC 1 Install this program from the supplied CD ROM by double click address and IP address Application gt SetIP gt Setup exe For example Follow the instructions in the installation window MAC Address 00 15 99 41 A2 78 Connect your machine to the network with a network cable IP Address 169 254 192 192 Turn on the machine U A W N From the Windows Start menu select All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt SetIP gt SetIP 2 Using a Network Connected Machine Wired network setup 6 Click the Tt icon third from left in the SetIP window to open the TCP IP configuration window Enter the machine s new information into the configuration window as follows In a corporate intranet you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding TCP IP Configuration TCP IP Mac Address IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Cancel Find the machine s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 and enter it without the colons For example 00 15 99 29 51 A8 becomes 0015992951A8 Click Apply and then click OK The machine will autom
269. rrors that occur during the wireless software installation and settings refer to the troubleshotting section in the wireless setting chapter see Troubleshooting for wireless network on page 212 Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing Clear the paper jam Paper sticks together e Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper e Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Multiple sheets of paper do not feed Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Load paper of only one type size and weight Paper does not feed into the machine e Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine The paper keeps jamming e There is too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the manual feeding in tray e Anincorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front cover and remove any debris Envelopes skew or fail t
270. rstanding your network type Typically you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a time Infrastructure mode r This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs PE y Small Office Home Office This mode uses an access point to 7 3 communicate with the wireless machine Ad hoc mode yy This mode does not use an access point The wireless 3 computer and wireless machine communicate directly Wireless network name and network password Wireless networks require higher security so when an access point is first set up a network name SSID the type of security used and a Network Password are created for the network Ask your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine installation 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 192 Wireless network setup Introducing wireless set up methods You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer Choose the setting method from the below table KA Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on the model or country Set up method Connecting method i Description amp Reference From the computer Windows user see Access point via USB cable recommended on page 198 A Mac user see Access point via USB cable recommended on page 203 B E EE See Using a network cab
271. rt on the control panel when you hear a high pitched fax signal from the remote fax machine Sending a fax to multiple destinations You can use the multiple send feature which allows you to send a fax to multiple locations Originals are automatically stored in memory and sent to a remote station After transmission the originals are automatically erased from memory KA You cannot send faxes with this feature if you chosen super fine as an option or if the fax is in color 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 2 Select PIITAN on the control panel Or select Fax gt SpeedDial Send or Group Dial Send gt EJ settings on the touch screen 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup i Basic faxing 3 Adjust the resolution and the darkness to suit your fax needs see Adjusting the document settings on page 79 Select 3 Menu gt Fax Feature gt Multi Send on the control panel Or select Next on the touch screen Enter the number of the first receiving fax machine and press OK You can press speed dial numbers or select a group dial number using the Address book button Enter the second fax number and press OK The display asks you to enter another fax number to send the document To enter more fax numbers press OK when Yes appears and repeat steps 5 and 6 e You can add up to 10 desti
272. rt inside the machine may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Black or color background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable Change to a lighter weight paper AaBbCc e Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount pected of background shading Kaba e Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 AaBbCc e Thoroughly redistribute the toner see Redistributing toner on page 95 Toner smear e Clean the inside of the machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 Check the paper type and quality AaBbCc e Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc 6 Troubleshooting Printing quality problems Condition Vertical repetitive defects AaBbCc PP AaBbCc AaBbCc PR AaBbCc AaBbCc It Suggested solutions If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals e The toner cartridge may be damaged If you still have the same problem remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 e Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the defects occur on the b
273. s 5 Useful Management Tools 320 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Fax to PC Settings Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected device Disable If Disable is On incoming faxes will not be received on this device Device Settings Enable Fax Receiving from Device Enables faxing on the device and allow f more options to be set You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper layout emulation network and print information Alert Settings Windows only Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings related to error alerting This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles Printer Alert Provides settings related to when alerts will be received Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the Email Alert Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email device Alert History Provides a history of device and toner related alerts Basic tab Contains settings related general scan and device settings Image tab Contains settings related to image altering Job Accou nting Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting software such as SyncThru or Cou
274. s on page 267 To save electricity this machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google Cloud Print enabled apps see Google Cloud Print on page 219 Fast high resolution printing Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard see Easy Capture Manager on page 306 Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine s status and allows you to customize the machine s settings see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 322 or Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager on page 319 e You can print in a full range of colors using cyan magenta yellow and black Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan You can print with a resolution of up to 9 600 x 600 dpi effective output 600 compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format x 600 x4 bit These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax see Using Samsung Easy Document Creator on page 314 Key benefits e AnyWeb Print helps you screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program see Samsung AnyWeb Print on page 308 Smart Update allows you to check for the latest s
275. s at the same time e Your computer access point or wireless router or machine may not be turned on e Check the wireless reception around the machine If the router is far from the machine or there is an obstacle you might have difficulty receiving the signal e Cycle the power for the access point or wireless router machine and computer Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication Check whether firewall software V3 or Norton is blocking the communication If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot be found when searching firewall software might be blocking the communication Refer to the user s guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the machine again Check whether the machine s IP address is allocated correctly You can check the IP address by printing the network configuration report e Check whether the access point or wireless router has a configured security password If it has a password refer to the access point or wireless router administrator Check the machine s IP address Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings to connect to the machine on the network Due to the characteristics of DHCP the allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the access point has been reset Register the product s MAC address when you confogure the DHCP server on the access point or wireles
276. s feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods WIA WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition To use this feature your see Variety feature on page 8 computer must be connected directly with the machine via an USB cable see Scanning using the WIA driver on page 287 USB Memory You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto an USB memory device Email You can send the scanned image as an email attachment See Scanning to email on page 284 FTP SMB You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP SMB server see Scanning to FTP SMB server on page 285 4 Special Features 282 Scan features Setting the scan settings in the computer 5 This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 Open Samsung Easy Printer Manager see Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager on page 319 Select the appropriate machine from the Printer List Select Scan to PC Settings menu Select the option you want Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device Basic tab Contains settings related to general scan and device settings Image tab Contains settings related to image altering Press Save gt OK Scanning from network connected machine K The machine that does not support the network interface it will not be able to use this feature see Rear view on page 23 Make sure the printer dri
277. s router Then you can always use the IP address that is set with the MAC address You can identify the Mac address of your machine by printing a network configuration report see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 Check the wireless environment You might not be able to connect to the network in the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user s information before connecting to the access point or wireless router This machine only supports IEEE 802 11 b g n and Wi Fi Other wireless communication types e g Bluetooth are not supported When using the ad hoc mode in operating systems such as Windows Vista you might need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for Samsung wireless network machines The machine is within the range of the wireless network The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal Remove any large metal objects between the access point or wireless router and the machine Make sure the machine and wireless access point or wireless router are not separated by poles walls or support columns containing metal or concrete 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 214 Wireless network setup e The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the wireless signal Many devices can interfere with the wir
278. sages Network related messages Message IP Conflict This IP address conflicts with that of other system Meaning The network IP address you have set is being used by someone else Suggested solutions Check the IP address and reset it if necessary see Advanced Guide e 802 1x Network Error 802 1x Network Error Contact the Admin Misc messages Message Adjusting Color Registration Fail to authenticate Meaning The machine is adjusting the color registration Check the network authentication protocol If the problem persists contact your network administrator Suggested solutions Wait a few minutes Message Door is open Meaning The front cover or rear Suggested solutions Close the cover until it Close it cover is not securely locks into place latched Scanner door open The document feeder Close the cover until it Door of scanner is open Close the door cover is not securely latched locks into place e Calibrating image density The machine is calibrating the image density Wait a few minutes Error error number Actuator unit type Failure error number Call for service Error error number unit type Failure error number Turn off then on Error error number unit type Unit Failure error number Turn off then on unit type Unit Failure error number Please turn off then on The machine
279. screen Select a save location for the scanned images Click Save to save the image K Click Scan More to scan another image with the same settings Scanning to a Social Networking Site Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Click SNS Upload from the home screen Click Scan to SNS gt Start Click Scan Upload Existing File PUB WN Click SNS Upload from the home screen Click Existing File to SNS gt Start Select the site and click Add Image to find the file to upload Select a social networking site to send the image and click Next Follow the instructions in each social networking site If there are some problems on accessing or uploading to each SNS site due to a network environment issue it s needed to check security limitations established in your network with network administrator To guarantee correct functioning of SNS upload in Samsung Easy Document Creator unrestricted network environment is needed for HTTPS communication Converting to an E Book Scan Directly 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 Click E Book Conversion from the home screen 5 Useful Management Tools Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 3 5 Click Scan to E Book
280. ses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax To use the Ans Fax mode attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine DRPD You can receive a call using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD feature Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables an user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers For further details see Receiving faxes using DRPD mode on page 299 T This setting may not be available depending on your country 3 Press OK 4 Press Stop Clear button or home fag icon to return to ready mode Receiving manually in Tel mode You can receive a fax call by pressing Von Hook Dial button and then pressing Start when you hear a fax tone If your machine has a handset you can answer calls using the handset see Features by models on page 5 Receiving in Answering Machine Fax mode To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on the back of your machine If the caller leaves a message the answering machine stores the message If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to receive the fax 2 e Ifyou have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is switched off or no answering machine is connected to EXT socket your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after a predefined n
281. sion FCC Intentional emitter per FCC Part 15 Low power Radio LAN devices radio frequency RF wireless communication devices operating in the 2 4 GHz 5 GHz Band may be present embedded in your printer system This section is only applicable if these devices are present Refer to the system label to verify the presence of wireless devices Wireless devices that may be in your system are only qualified for use in the United States of America if an FCC ID number is on the system label 5 Appendix 160 Regulatory information The FCC has set a general guideline of 20 cm 8 inches separation between the FCC Statement for Wireless LAN use device and the body for use of a wireless device near the body this does not include extremities This device should be used more than 20 cm 8 inches from the body when wireless devices are on The power output of the wireless While installing and operating this transmitter and antenna combination device or devices which may be embedded in your printer is well below the the radio frequency exposure limit of 1m W cm2 may be exceeded at RF exposure limits as set by the FCC distances close to the antenna installed Therefore the user must maintain a minimum distance of 20cm from the antenna at all times This device This transmitter must not be collocated or operation in conjunction with any cannot be colocated with another transmitter and transmitting antenna other antenna or trans
282. so use this feature from the SyncThru Control Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Security tab gt User Access Control see Registering authorized users on page 265 Change Admin Changes the machine s password for accessing the Admin Password Setup Firmware To upgrade the latest firmware turn this option On and Upgrade then download the firmware file Stamp Sets the stamp feature to access the Admin Setup menu 3 Useful Setting Menus 253 Eco Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 To change the menu options e Press Eco select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item Description Select eco mode and change on off or on forced Eco On 3 option Sets eco related settings and change default settings e Default Mode Select this to turn on or off the Settings default mode Feature Configuration Select the Default mode or Custom mode 3 Useful Setting Menus 254 Direct USB Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 To change the menu options e Press Direct USB gt select the menu item you want on the touch screen Item D
283. ss OK to navigate to lower level menus for some models Custom Eco Change any necessary values 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 68 Basic printing 3 Press OK to save the selection Setting eco mode on the driver To take advantage of the advanced printing features click Properties or Preferences from the Print window see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Open the Eco tab to set Eco mode When you see the eco image 4 that means the eco mode is currently enabled Eco options Printer Default Follows the settings from the machine s control panel None Disables Eco mode e Eco Printing Enables eco mode Activate the various Eco items you want to use e Password If the administrator fixed to enable the Eco mode you have to enter the password to change the status 2 Password button You can set from SyncThru Web Service Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt System gt Eco Settings or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt Eco the password button is activated To change the print settings click on this button enter the password or need to contact the administrator Result simulator Result Simulator shows the results of reduced emission of carbon dioxide used electricity and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected e The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed paper is one hundred without a blank page when
284. st Prints the PS PS3 font list Supplies Info e Supplies Information Prints supplies information page Usage Counter Prints a usage page The usage page contains the total number of pages printed Address Book Prints all of the email addresses currently stored in the machine s memory Demo Page Prints the demo page to check whether your machine is printing properly or not Fax Send Confirmation Prints fax confirmation result Fax Options Prints the information of a fax reports This is used only available when Job Accounting is enabled from the SyncThru Web Admin Account Service You can print a report of printout counts for each user 3 Useful Setting Menus System setup x Item Description Maintenance If you use a machine in a humid area or you are using the damp print media caused by a high humidity the print outs on the output tray may be curled and may not be i i i i Paper Stackin POME menus may nor appra Ki thediplay depending cal APDO p 9 stacked properly In this case you can set the machine to models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on R a 33 use this function to let print outs stacked firmly But pagans using this function will make the print speed slow Ram Disk Enables disables Ram disk to manage jobs To change the menu options e Press Menu gt System Setup gt Maintenance on the control pa
285. st visible service the internal website IP address An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard Glossary 361 Glossary IPM ITU T The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWa
286. sung does not recommend using a non genuine Samsung toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured Samsung cannot guarantee a non genuine Samsung toner cartridge s quality Service or repair required as a result of using non genuine Samsung toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty Tray related messages Message Meaning Suggested solutions e Output bin full Output bin full Remove printed paper The output tray is full Remove papers from the output tray the printer resumes printing Message Paper jam or empty in tray Meaning Paper has jammed in the paper feed area e Thereis no paper in tray Suggested solutions Clear the jam see CLX 419XN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series on page 125 e Load paper in tray see Multi purpose or Manual feeder tray on page 52 Paper Empty in tray 1 Paper is empty in tray 1 Load paper There is no paper in tray 1 Load paper in tray 1 see Tray 1 optional tray on page 49 Paper Empty in tray 2 Paper is empty in tray 2 Load paper There is no paper in tray 2 Load paper in tray 2 see Tray 1 optional tray on page 49 Paper Empty in MP Paper is empty in MP tray Load paper There is no paper in the multi purpose tray Load paper in the multi purpose tray see Multi purpose or Manual feeder tray on page 52 4 Troubleshooting 138 Understanding display mes
287. t on page 178 If the computer s network information is as shown below 2 Check the printer port s IP address from your computer Paddress 169 254 133 442 a Click the Windows Start menu Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 b For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes Then the machine s network information should be as below e For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware SIS machine s and Sound gt Printers P address 169 254 133 43 e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Gateway 169 254 133 1 Devices and Printers c Right click your machine d For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties Other problems For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer e Click Port tab f Click Configure Port button If problems occur while using the machine on a network check the following g Check if Printer Name or IP Address is the IP address on the network configuration Sheet 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 213 Wireless network setup a For information on the access point or wireless router refer to its own user s guide You cannot enable wired and wireless network
288. t MP Tray Opacity N up Copy Duplex Duplex Duplex Text Photo Manual Feeder Position Duplex Original Type Original Type Original Type Photo Layout Watermark Darkness Original Size Original Size Original Size ema Off ID Copy Color Mode Color Mode SpeedDial Send Color Mode Color Mode igi i i i Collation Darkness Original Size On Hook Dial Darkness Redial Auto 2 up Color Mode Original Type Darkness Resolution Darkness Color 4 up Color N up Resolution Duplex Resolution mong ID Copy Mono Book Copy Duplex Original Type Duplex Custom Copy Book Copy Auto Fit Copy Darkness Original Type Original Size Original Type Duplex Adjust Background Darkness Color Mode Original Size Color Mode Original Size Reduce Enlarge Edge Erase Original Type Original Size Color Mode Color Mode Darkness off Color Mode Original Type Color Mode Book Co SmallOriginal callate Copy FX Original Size 3 Hole Punch Duplex Original Type Book Center Darkness Tray a CLX 626xFW Series only b This is an optional feature CLX 626xFW Series only c CLX 419xFW Series only d This option appears only when the Layout option is Book Copy 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Menu overview Local PC Destination Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Original Size Original Type Darkness Network PC Destination Resolution Color Mode File Format PDF Encryption Duplex Original Size Original Type Darkness Send
289. t arrow to select No and press OK 3 Select Setup Data Address Book and press OK 7J Press x Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready The data is backed up to the USB memory mode 4 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 8a Using USB memory device Restoring data If you see or D in the front of a folder name there are one or more files or folders in the selected folder 1 Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB memory port 2 Select 2 Menu gt System Setup gt Machine Setup gt Import Setting A After deleting files or reformatting a USB memory device files cannot be on the control panel restored Therefore confirm that you no longer need the data before Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Initial Setup gt Import deleting it Setting on the touch screen Select Setup Data Address Book and press OK s 1 j Deleting an image file Select the file you want to restore and press OK Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine 2 For touch screen model select Direct USB gt File Manage gt Next gt select a file gt settings gt Delete on the touch screen Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready EJ mode AUA W 1 Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine and then press Direct USB Managi
290. t does not work properly choose Select Printer Software and your machine name in Print Using 21 Click Add Your machine appears in the Printer List and is set as the default machine 9 To install the fax driver a Open the Applications folder gt Samsung gt Fax Queue Creator b Your machine appears on the Printer List c Select machine to use and Click Create button You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 185 Installing driver over the network Install the Linux driver and add network printer Add a network printer oO ON AU PWD 11 12 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Samsung website Extract the UnifiedLinuxDriver tar gz file and open the new directory Double click the cdroot gt autorun The Samsung installer window opens Click Next The add printer wizard window opens Click Next Select network printer and click Search button The machine s IP address and model name appears on list field Select your machine and click Next Input the printer description and Next After the machine is added click Finish When installation is done click Finish CON QAU A W N Double click
291. tall All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install Enter the password and click OK Installing software requires you to restart your computer Click Continue Installation After the installation is finished click Quit or Restart 14 15 16 17 18 2 Open the Applications folder gt Utilities gt Print Setup Utility For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 open the Applications folder gt System Preferences and click Print amp Fax Click Add on the Printer List For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 click the folder icon a display window will pop up Click Default Browser and find the USB connection For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 click Default and find the USB connection For Mac OS X 10 4 if Auto Select does not work properly select Samsung in Print Using and your machine name in Model For Mac OS X 10 5 10 7 if Auto Select does not work properly select Select a driver to use and your machine name in Print Using Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the default machine Click Add To install the fax driver a Open the Applications folder gt Samsung gt Fax Queue Creator b Your machine appears on the Printer List c Select machine to use and click Create button 1 Software Installation Reinstallation for Mac If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it wS Au bb
292. ter driver has not been configured to recognize the optional tray Open the PostScript driver properties select the Device Options tab and set the tray option see Setting Device Options on page 102 When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader 6 Troubleshooting 352 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer care center Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site CAMEROON i 7095 0077 www samsung com 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ca CANADA www samsung com ca_fr French 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com babasa From mobile 02 482 82 00 CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com COLOMBIA 01 8000112112 www samsung com COSTA RICA 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com COTE D LVOIRE 8000 0077 www samsung com CROATIA 062 SAMSUNG 062 726 7864 www samsung com CYPRUS 8009 4000 only from landline www samsung com CZECH REPUBLIC 800 SAMSUNG 800 726786 www samsung com Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak s r o Oasis Florenc Sokolovska 394 17 180 00 Praha 8 Co
293. the Eco mode is disabled e Refers to the calculation coefficient about CO2 energy and paper from IEA the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www remanufacturing org uk Each model has a different index e The power consumption in printing mode refers to the average printing power consumption of this machine e Theactual amount displayed is only an estimate as the actual amount may differ depending on the operating system used computing performance application software connection method media type thickness media size job complexity etc 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 69 Basic printing Secure printing When you use a printing device in an office school or other public place you can protect your personal documents or confidential information by using the secure printing feature Starting secure printing on the driver Open the Printing Preferences window see Opening printing preferences on page 66 and the select Advanced tab gt Print Mode gt Confidential Enter the job name user ID and password Even though you have started the secure printing job the device will not print the document until you enter your password on the printer Wi CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series only e You can use this feature after installing the optional memory e If you did not install optional memory you can set the menus as shown below From a computer s
294. the altitude value determine the altitude where you are see Altitude adjustment on page 257 3 Select the option you want then press OK 4 Press OK to save the selection 5 Press Stop Clear button or home icon to return to ready mode 2 Refer to below links to set other settings useful for using the machine See Entering various characters on page 260 See Keypad letters and numbers on page 260 See Setting the paper size and type on page 58 See Setting up the fax address book on page 261 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine Tray overview A Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause To change the size you need to adjust the paper guides problems or require repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s HAHAH RENE EEE CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN Series CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could CLX 419xFW Series CLX 626xFR CLX 626xFW Series cause damage to the machine e Using inflammable print media can cause a fire e Use designated print media see Print media specifications on page 146 e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause
295. the door see Front view on page 21 Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly see Clearing paper jams on page 122 Printouts are blurry The toner level might be low or uneven Shake the toner cartridge see Redistributing toner on page 95 Try a different print resolution setting see Opening printing preferences on page 66 Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Where can download the machine s driver You can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads About this user s guide This user s guide provides information for your basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage Read the safety information before using the machine If you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter All illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model you purchased The screenshots in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on the machine s firmware driver version The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on Windows 7 Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeab
296. the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 If these steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative The top half of the paper is printed lighter than the rest of the paper AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc The toner might not adhere properly to this type of paper Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click the Paper tab and set the paper type to Recycled see Opening printing preferences on page 66 6 Troubleshooting 335 Printing quality problems Condition Toner specks Suggested solutions The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough e The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 A iC Cc The paper path may need cleaning Contact a service representative see Cleaning the machine on page 108 A amp iC c A amp C c ABC A i c Dropouts If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page
297. this situation occurs try to release the port by selecting Release port in the Port configuration window The machine does not appear Ensure your machine is attached to your computer connected properly via the USB port and is turned on on the scanners list Ensure the scanner driver for your machine is installed in your system Open Unified Linux Driver configurator switch to Scanners configuration then press Drivers Make sure that driver with a name corresponding to your machine s name is listed in the window e Ensure the port is not busy Since functional components of machine printer and scanner share the same I O interface port the situation of simultaneous access of different user applications to the same port is possible To avoid possible conflicts only one of them at a time is allowed to gain control over the device The other user will encounter device busy response This usually happens when starting a scan procedure An appropriate message box appears To identify the source of the problem open the Ports configuration and select the port assigned to your scanner port s symbol dev mfp0 corresponds to LP 0 designation displayed in the scanners options dev mfp1 relates to LP 1 and so on USB ports start at dev mfp4 so scanner on USB 0 relates to dev mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially In the Selected port pane you can see if the port is occupied by another application If this is the case you sh
298. tion the machine transmits using the highest resolution mode supported by the other fax machine 2 Select a darkness level you want Photo Fax Originals containing shades of gray or photographs 3 Press X Stop Clear button or home fay icon to return to ready mode 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup 80 Using USB memory device This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine About USB memory USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations downloaded music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the following tasks on your machine by using a USB memory device Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device Print data stored on a USB memory device Restore backup files to the machine s memory Format the USB memory device Check the available memory space Plugging in a USB memory device The USB memory port on the front of your machine is designed for USB V1 1 and USB V2 0 memory devices Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16 FAT32 and a sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB memory device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug connector DE oF m a gt O X Use only a metal shielded USB memory device Only use a USB memory device that has obtained compatibility
299. to place another page Load another original and press Yes When you finish select No for this option e Mono Displays an image in black and white 1 bit per pixel File Policy Darkness Adjusts the brightness level to scan You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with the scan job through server or USB memory device If the server or the USB memory device already has the same name you enter you can change the name cancel the job or overwrite it e Rename The sent file is saved as a different file name that is automatically programmed e Overwrite Overwrites the existing the file File Name Makes a file name to store the scan data 3 Useful Setting Menus 238 Scan Item Description Item Description You can set the machine to print server confirmation CC Sends the copy of the email to an additional recipient result report BCC The same as CC but the recipient s name is not displayed Server Confirmation f 2 yau pial a Error tie machine panig Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on the ALONA NING PRIMO WSD connected computer if it supports the WSD Web successful Service for Device feature You can set the machine to print email confirmation result report E e Ifyou select On Error the machine prints a report only when a transmission is not Email Confirmation successful e Ifa report contains characters
300. to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the c AP SSID After completing the wireless network connection process instructions in the window to set up the wireless network the AP s SSID information appears on the display 5 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 195 Wireless network setup Machines without a display screen Connecting in PBC mode 1 Press and hold the 63 WPS button on the control panel for about 2 4 seconds until the status LED blinks quickly The machine starts connecting to the wireless network The LED blinks slowly for up to two minutes until you press the PBC button on the access point or wireless router Press the WPS PBC button on the access point or wireless router a Thelight blinks fast on the WPS LED The machine is connecting to the access point or wireless router b When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network the WPS LED light stays on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive and follow the instructions in the window to set up the wireless network Connecting in PIN mode 1 The network configuration report including PIN must be printed see Printing a network configuration report on page 178 In ready mode press and hol
301. toner container If it is already installed try to reinstall the waste toner container If the problem persists call for service with a new one Contact the service representatives Install TR belt unit Install image transfer belt unit The transfer belt is not installed Install a Samsung Replace pickup roller Replace with new tray type pickup roller The life of the tray1 tray2 or MP tray pick up roller will expired soon Replace the tray pick up roller with a new one Contact the service representatives genuine transfer belt Contact the service representatives TR Not compatible Image transfer belt unit is not compatible Check guide The transfer belt of the machine is not for your machine Install the a Samsung genuine part designed for your machine Contact the service representatives Replace retard roller End of life Replace with new tray type retard roller The life of the tray1 or tray2 retard roller has expired Replace the tray retard roller with a new one Contact the service representatives 4 Troubleshooting 140 Understanding display messages Message Memory Full Fax memory is almost full Print or remove received fax job Memory Full Fax memory is full Print or remove received fax job Meaning Suggested solutions The memory is full No more fax data can be received Print or remove the received fa
302. tup Fax Sound Paper Size Report Tray 1 Configuration Tray 2 Supplies Info MP Tray Demo Page Manual Feeder PAANS BOOK Fax Send Change Default Paper Type Paper Source Margin Tray Confirm Confirmation Fax Sent E mail Sent Fax Received Fax Scheduled Jobs Network Configuration PCL Font List PS Font List Usage Counter Account Maintenance CLR Empty Msg Supplies Life Image Mgr Custom Color Auto Color Reg Tone Adjustment Default Auto Tone Adj Standard tone Cal ID Sensor TonerLow Alert Serial Number Ram Disk Paper Stacking 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup Job Manage Active Job Secured Job Stored Job Menu overview e This option only appears when small amount of toner is left in the cartridge f This option is available when the optional mass storage device optional memory or Ram disk is installed Network TCP IP IPv4 Network Configuration DHCP Net Activate BOOTP Http Activate Static WINS TCP IP IPv6 SNMP V1 V2 IPv6 Activate SNTP DHCPv6 Config UPnP SSDP Ethernet Speed MDNS Automatic SetIP 10Mbps Half SLP 10Mbps Full 100Mbps Half 100Mbps Full 1Gbps Full 802 1x Clear Settings 2 Menu Overview and Basic Setup EI Menu overview CLX 419xFW CLX 626xFW Series You can set menus easily using the touch screen Introducing the Home Screen r The Main screen is shown on the touch screen on the control panel
303. tup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Network Setup gt Wireless gt Wi Fi smartphone Direct on the touch screen Enable Wi Fi Direct 2 Using a Network Connected Machine lana Wireless network setup 2 e When you have found the printer you want to connect to from your mobile device select the printer and the printer s LED will blink Press the WPS button on the printer and it will be connected to your mobile device If your mobile device does not support Wi Fi Direct you need to enter the Network Key of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button Troubleshooting for wireless network Problems during setup or driver installation Printers Not Found Your machine may not be turned on Turn on your computer and the machine USB cable is not connected between your computer and machine Connect the machine to your computer using the USB cable The machine does not support wireless networking Check the machine s user s guide included on the software CD supplied with your machine and prepare a wireless network machine Connecting Failure SSID Not Found The machine is unable to find the network name SSID you have selected or entered Check the network name SSID on your access point and try connecting again Your access point is not turned on Turn on your access point Connecting Failure Invalid Security Security is not configured correctly Check the configured security on your access point and machine
304. u Web Service and then easily and quickly enter fax numbers by entering the location numbers assigned to them in address book Registering a speed dial number 1 Select amp fax gt Address Book gt New amp Edit gt Speed Dial on the control panel Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book gt Phone Book gt View List gt Individual gt E options gt Add on the touch screen Enter a speed dial number and press OK N number press Back 3 Enter the name you want and press OK This function is not supported for CLX 419xN CLX 626xND Series see KA If an entry is already stored in the number you choose the display shows the message to allow you to change it To start over with another speed dial 4 Enter the fax number you want and press OK 5 Press Stop Clear button or home fay icon to return to ready mode Using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax enter the speed dial number at which you stored the number you want WA For a one digit 0 9 speed dial number press and hold the corresponding digit button on the number keypad for more than 2 seconds For a two or three digit speed dial number press the first digit button s and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds You can print the address book list by selecting 45 fax gt Address Book gt Print Or select Setup gt
305. u cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the printer s Wi Fi Direct e The supported protocol list may differ from your model Wi Fi Direct networks do NOT support IPv6 network filtering IPSec WINS and SLP services The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi Fi Direct is 3 Setting up Wi Fi Direct You can enable Wi Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods From the USB cable connected computer recommended After the driver installation is complete Samsung Easy Printer Manager can be set and changes in the Wi Fi Direct can be made KA Samsung Easy Printer Manager is Available for Windows and Mac OS users only From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Device Settings gt Network Wi Fi Direct On Off Select On to enable 2 Using a Network Connected Machine gg Wireless network setup Device Name Enter the printer s name for searching for your printer on a wireless network By default the device name is the model name From the network connected computer If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point you can enable and configure Wi Fi Direct from SyncThru Web Service IP Address Enter the IP address of the printer This IP address is used only for the local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless network We recommend using the d
306. u set up your machine you enter your name or your Key Assigned numbers letters or characters company s name and the fax number When you store fax numbers or email 1 1 addresses in memory you may also enter the corresponding names 2 ABCabc2 3 DEFdef3 Entering alphanumeric characters 4 GHIghi4 5 JKLjkI5 Press the button until the correct letter appears on the display For example to enter the letter O press 6 labeled with MNO Each time you press 6 the display 6 MNOmno6 shows a different letter M N O m n o and finally 6 To find the letter that you 7 PORSpars7 want to enter see Keypad letters and numbers on page 260 8 TUVtuv8 WXYZ 9 WA e You can enter a space by pressing 1 twice Hi a e To delete the last digit or character press the left right or up down arrow 0 amp 0 button ii _ l O These symbols are available when you type for network authentication lt gt Keypad letters and numbers These symbols are available when you type for network authentication 2 e Special character sets may differ from your machine depending on its options or the models e Some of the follow key values may not appear depending on the job you are doing 4 Special Features 260 Setting up the fax address book Variety feature on page 8 You can set up speed number with the fax numbers you use frequently via SyncThr
307. uitable for your machine Install the corresponding toner cartridge with a Samsung genuine cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Replace new color toner Replace with new color toner cartridge Theindicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life You can choose Stop or Continue as shown on the control panel If you select Stop the printer stops printing If you select Continue the printer keeps printing but the printing quality cannot be guaranteed e Replace the toner cartridge for the best print quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Theindicated toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 4 Troubleshooting Understanding display messages a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19798 see Available consumables on page 89 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment percentage of image area printing interval media percentage of image area and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when replace new cartridge appears and the machine stops printing Sam
308. ult The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized Glossary 358 Glossary DHCP DPI A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network DNS Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one
309. umber is the more vivid the background is Erase Lev 1 4 The higher the number is the lighter Edge Erase the background is Description Allows you to erase spots drill holes fold creases and staple marks along any of the four edges of a document e Off Does not use this feature SmallOriginal rases the edge of the original if it is small This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass e Hole Punch Erases the marks of bookbinding holes Book Center Erases the middle part of the paper which is black and horizontal when you copy a book This feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass Border Erase Enter the left right top bottom margin using Number keypad 3 Useful Setting Menus 228 Copy Item Watermark Description Item The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document Duplex continue Duplex You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper e 1Sided Scans one side of an original and prints iton one side of the paper 1 52Sided AA BB AA AB gt A 1 52Sided Rotated AY gt At 2 51Sid
310. umber of rings e If the answering machine has a user selectable ring counter set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring e Ifthe machine is in Tel mode disconnect or switch off the answering machine with the fax machine Otherwise the outgoing message from the answering machine will interrupt your phone conversation 4 Special Features 298 Fax features Receiving faxes with an extension telephone 2 This setting may not be available depending on your country When you are using an extension telephone connected to the EXT socket you can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone Select amp fax gt 8 Menu gt Fax Setup gt Receiving gt Receive Mode gt DRPD on the control panel without going to the fax machine Or select Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Default Setting gt Fax When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the Default gt Common gt Receive Mode gt DRPD on the touch screen keys 9 on the extension phone The machine receives the fax 9 js the remote receive code preset at the factory The first and the last 2 Call your fax number from another telephone asterisks are fixed but you can change the middle number to whatever you want 3 When your machine begins to ring do not answer the call The machine requires several rings to learn the pattern When the machine completes learning the display sh
311. untry Region Customer Care Center Web Site ALBANIA 42 275755 www samsung com ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 www samsung com AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com 10 SAMSUNG 7267864 F AUSTRIA 0810 a SUNG 7267864 www samsung com 0 07 min AZERBAIJAN 088 55 55 555 www samsung com BAHRAIN 8000 4726 www samsung com BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung com 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be Dutch BELGIUM www samsung com be_fr French BOLIVIA 800 10 7260 www samsung com BOSNIA 05 133 1999 www samsung com 0800 124 421 www samsung com BRAZIL 4004 0000 BULGARIA 07001 33 11 www samsung com DENMARK 70701970 www samsung com DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com ECUADOR 1 800 10 7267 www samsung com EGYPT 08000 726786 www samsung com Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 1353 i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 1800 1100 11 Web Site www samsung com Country Region Customer Care Center Web Site EIRE 0818 717100 www samsung com EL SALVADOR 800 6225 www samsung com ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com G 726 7864 GERMANY 01805 AMBON 726 7864 www samsung com 0 14 min GEORGIA 8 800 555 555 www samsung com 0800 10077 www samsung com GHANA 0302 200077 80111 SAMSUNG 80111 726 www s
312. ur mobile device 11 Click Manage your printers If you do not have the application download it from the application store such as Android Market or App Store L Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service Google Cloud Print ready devices will appear in the list Access the Google Docs application from your mobile device Printing with Google Cloud Print Tap the option button of the document that you want to print The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you Tap the send b button are using You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print Tap the Cloud Print button service p O Set the printing options if you want Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet N AQ uw BW N Tap Click here to Print Printing from the Chrome browser Printing from an application on mobile device The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Android mobile phone Run Chrome Open the document or email that you want to print Click the wrench icon in the browser s top right corner Click Print A new tab for printing appears A W N 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 220 Google Cloud Print 5 Select Print with Google Cloud Print 6 Click the Print
313. ure that your machine is selected Click OK 4 Open the File menu and click Print 5 Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print 6 Click Print Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following Printing multiple pages on one sheet You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft copies 4 Special Features Printing features 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu Select a binding orientation from the Two Sided option 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages Select the other options to use per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper 3 Select the other options to use A If you print more than 2 copies the first copy and the second copy might 4 Click Print print on the same sheet of paper Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of paper Using help Printing
314. uter is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network setting you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address For the DHCP method If the IP address assignment method is DHCP check if DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows Static click Change TCP IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically DHCP For the Static method If the IP address assignment method is Static check if Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window If it shows DHCP click Change TCP IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the machine For example If the computer s network information is shown as follows IP address 169 254 133 42 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Then the machine s network information should be as shown below IP address 169 254 133 43 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Use the computer s subnet mask Gateway 169 254 133 1 2 Using a Network Connected Machine 206 Wireless network setup 13 When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed appears disconnect the network cable and click Next 2 e After completing the wireless network connection you need to install a machine driver to print from an application see Installing driver over the network on page 181 If the network cable is connected it may have trouble finding the machine when configuring the wir
315. ver is installed on your computer using the software CD since the printer driver includes the scan program see Installing the driver locally on page 30 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 60 2 Select Scan gt Scan To PC gt Network PC on the control panel Or select Scan gt Network PC on the touch screen WU If you see Not Available message check the port connection 3 Select your registered computer ID and enter the Password if necessary 4 Special Features 283 Scan features L jun ID is the same ID as the registered scan ID for Samsung Easy Printer an Manager gt Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings e Password is the 4 digit number registered password for Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt a Switch to advanced mode gt Scan to PC Settings Select the option you want and press OK Scanning begins Scanned image is saved in computer s C Users users name My Documents The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by models on page 5 Setting up an email account uu BF W N 2 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Using SyncThru Web Service on page 310 Select Settings gt Network Settings
316. verlays that you no longer use Overlay Deleting a page overlay Dan TO 4 Special Features Printing features Item Print Mode Description e This feature is available only if you have installed the mass storage device or optional memory see Variety feature on page 8 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine This feature is not enabled Storage Options check see Setting Device Options on page 102 e Without installing the mass storage device in the machine the Ram Disk feature provides only 3 options Normal Proof and Confidential Print Mode The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without saving the printing file in the memory Normal This mode prints without storing your document in the optional memory Proof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one copy first to check then print the rest of the copies later Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print Store Select this setting to save a document in the mass storage device without printing Store and Print This mode is used when printing and storing document at the same time Spool This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data If you select this setting the printer spools the document into the mass storage device and then prints it fro
317. x data in the memory Scanner Locked Scanner locking switch is locked Release it The scanner is locked Reboot the power If the problem persists please call for service Error error number Fax System Failure error number Install fax modem card again There is a problem in the fax system Install the fax card If it is already installed try to reinstall the fax card If the problem persists call for service Error error number UI System Failure error number Call for service There is a problem in the Ul system Unplug the power cord and plug it back in If the problem persists call for service Error error number EngineSystem Failure error number Call for service There is a problem in the engine system Unplug the power cord and plug it back in If the problem persists call for service 4 Troubleshooting nat 5 Appendix This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations e Specifications e Regulatory information e Copyright i Specifications General specifications KU The specification values listed below are subject to change without notice See www samsung com for possible changes in information Items Description CLX 419xN CLX 419xFN CLX 419xFW Series 420 x 426 x 448 mm 16 54 x 16 77 x 17 64 inches e CLX 626xND CLX 626xFD Series 420 x 452 5 x 476 8 mm 16 54 x
318. y Printer Manager the time automatically extends Tone Adjustment Default The machine automatically calibrate the e While the machine is connected to the toner density of machine for the best possible color network or working on a print job Auto print quality If you select Off the machine is calibrated Power Off feature doesn t work by the factory default toner density Auto Tone Adjustment Auto Tone Adj Allows you to automatically adjust tone for the best possible print quality e Image Allows you to adjust the color setting such as color Management registration color density etc R e Calibration ID Sensor Cal ID Sensor Automatically calculates the reduced or worn out supplies like toner or machine parts and uses this information to adjust Image Mar Custom Color This menu allows you to adjust contrast color by color the color density For example if the yellow toner is Default Optimizes colors automatically running out the machine calculates the amount of Print Density Allows you to manually adjust the color remaining yellow toner and adjusts color density so density for print Adjust the print density the printouts are fine It is recommended to use the Default setting for best color quality 3 Useful Setting Menus 244 System setup Item Description Paper setup Simplex Margin Sets the margin for one sided printing Some menus may not appear in the display depen
319. y Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 Solid color or black pages The machine may require repairing Contact a service representative 6 Troubleshooting go Printing quality problems Condition Suggested solutions Loose toner e Clean the inside of the machine see Cleaning the machine on page 108 e Check the paper type thickness and quality fetes e Remove the toner cartridge and then install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 a C f A2e8bCc If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Asv0Cc AA Se Character voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear The toner cartridge may be installed improperly Remove the cartridge and reinsert it The toner cartridge may be defective Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 97 If the problem persists the machine may require repairing Contact a service representative 6 Troubleshooting 341 Printing quality
320. y not appear in the display depending on options or Press Document Box gt Next gt select the menu item you want on the touch models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on Scre page 33 Option Description e Press Setup gt Machine Setup gt Next gt Address Book on the touch screen System Boxes Stores the printing data or prints the secure page Option Description Stored Print Prints out the stored data without entering password PhoneBook Adds views prints or deletes the phone book list You a Secired Prine Pinecone stored deta with also can create a group entering password Email Adds views prints or deletes the email list You also can Shared Folder Show the shared folders on your network and save your create a group jobs there Print Prints the address book Reset Resets the current address book 3 Useful Setting Menus go System setup Cg aa Selects the appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use the network environment see 2 Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or Setting IP address on page 178 models If so it is not applicable to your machine see Menu overview on page 33 TCP IP IPv4 There are lots of parameters to be set If you are not sure leave as is or consult the network administrator You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP ad
321. y settings Job Timeout Sets the length of time the printer waits before printing the last page of a print job that does not end with a command to print the page Language Sets the language of the text that appears on the control panel display Default Mode Sets the machine s default mode among fax mode copy mode or scan mode Default Paper Size You can set the default paper size to use Power Save Sets how long the machine waits before going to power save mode When the machine does not receive data for an extended period of time power consumption is automatically lowered Wakeup Event When this option is On you can wake up the machine from the power saving mode with the following actions e pressing any button on the control panel loading paperin a tray e opening or closing the front cover pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in e connecting a USB memory device only for the models that support USB memory devices 2 If the machine does not have the touch screen you can wake up the machine from the power saving mode by pressing any button on the control panel regardless of this option s setting 3 Useful Setting Menus 2m System setup Item Auto Continue Description Determine whether or not the machine continues printing when it detects the paper does not match the paper settings e 0 Sec This option allows you to continue printing when the paper

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

AXL ASAS Interface for Microsoft Excel  TE07-user Manual  Manual THERMOCAF-WHITE  Electroterapia  User`s Guide Pocket Autoranging DMM Model DM220  Little GIANT 500203 Instructions / Assembly  Docteur Claire Gazangel* Docteur Charles Gellman* Gilbert Tordjman  COLUNA DE TRANSMISSÃO      

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file